Skip to main content

Full text of "HYPNOSIS By George Hoben Estabrooks 1943"

See other formats


A  WARTIME  BOOK 

THIS  COMPLETE  EDITION  IS  PRODUCED 
IN  PULL  COMPLIANCE  WITH  THE  COVERN- 
MENTS  REGULATIONS  FOR  CONSERVING 
PAPER  AND  OTHER  ESSENTIAL  MATERIALS. 


FUN  TO  IN  THE  UNITED  STATES  OF  AUEUCA 
NT  THE  WILLIAM  SYO  PUSS,  INC 
HCHMONI),  VIRGINIA 


HYPNOSIS  by  G.H.  Estabrooks 
©1943 


Estabrooks  first  5  chapters  in  PDF  form.  Originally  webbed  by  Arnie  Lerma. 


Chapter  I 

THE  INDUCTION  OF  HYPNOTISM 

PERHAPS  the  best  approach  to  an  understanding  of  hypnotism  is  through  the 
popular  but  somewhat  unscientific  idea  of  the  unconscious  mind.  For  example, 
we  all  have  friends  who  walk  in  their  sleep,  in  some  cases  performing  (eats  of 
balancing  on  narrow  balconies  which  would  be  impossible  in  the  waking  state. 
When  they  awaken,  they  have  no  knowledge  of  what  has  happened  yet  their 
bodies  were  certainly  under  control  of  some  directing  force. 


Better  as  an  illustration  is  the  man  who  talks  in  his  sleep.  At  times  we  can  enter 
into  conversation  with  him.  If  we  are  careful  and  know  how  to  proceed,  he  will 
talk  just  as  sanely  and  often  far  more  frankly  than  when  awake.  Yet  when  we 
do  awaken  him,  his  mind  is  a  blank  as  to  what  has  occurred.  Again,  it  would 
appear  that  something  must  be  guiding  his  thoughts  during  this  period  of 
conversation.  We  will  call  this  "something"  the  unconscious  mind,  a  very 
convenient  name  for  our  own  ignorance,  and  a  concept  we  will  have  to  examine 
much  more  carefully  in  later  pages. 

This  last  example  provides  us  with  an  excellent  introduction  to  our  subject,  for 
the  individual  who  talks  in  his  sleep  and  answers  questions  is  really  hypnotized. 
In  fact,  this  is  one  recognized  method  of  producing  the  trance,  namely  by 
changing  normal  sleep  into  hypnotic  sleep.  The  skilled  hypnotist  can  generally 
take  the  sleep-walker  or  sleep-talker  and  shift  him  directly  over  into  deep 
hypnotism  without  either  the  knowledge  or  the  consent  of  his  subject.  Let  us 
see  what  appears  to  happen  in  such  a  case.  When  we  are  in  the  normal  waking 
condition,  the  conscious  mind  is  run  ning  the  body.  We  act,  talk,  and  think  as 
we  please,  although  such  a  statement  implies  "free  will,"  a  very  controversial 
point  which  we  will  avoid  in  this  book  as  of  only  theoretical  interest.  But  in 
deep  hypnotism  this  conscious  mind  of  ours  has  been  dethroned.  Our  actions 
are  now  under  the  will  of  the  operator  who  controls  our  activities  and  deals 
directly  with  the  so-called  unconscious  mind. 

If  he  tells  us  there  is  a  black  dog  standing  by  our  chair,  we  will  see  the  animal 
clearly  and  pet  it.  We  will  hear  a  symphony  orchestra  at  his  suggestion  and 
describe  the  pieces  being  rendered.  He  may  suggest  we  are  Abraham  Lincoln 
and  we  will  give  his  Gettysburg  Address  or  he  may  tell  us  that  we  have 
absolutely  no  feeling  in  our  jaws,  that  the  dentist  is  about  to  pull  a  tooth  and  we 
will  feel  no  pain.  He  may  even  throw  the  whole  thing  into  the  future,  saying 
that  tomorrow  at  four  P.m.  no  matter  where  we  are,  we  will  suddenly  see  a 
black  dog  at  our  side,  will  pet  him  and  lead  him  home. 

So  the  first  concept  we  get  of  hypnotism  is  that  curious  picture  of  an 
unconscious  mind  controlled  by  the  conscious  mind  of  the  operator.  The 
subject  will  accept  any  suggestion  the  operator  gives,  within  certain  limits 
which  we  will  consider  in  later  pages. 

In  fact,  suggestion  appears  to  be  the  key  of  hypnotism.  It  is  the  method  by 
which  the  hypnotist  first  gains  his  control  and  unseats  the  normal  conscious 
mind.  After  this,  he  finds  that  his  only  way  of  controlling  the  subject  is  again 
through  suggestion,  for  the  subject  left  to  himself  will  generally  do  nothing  at 
all.  He  acts  and  behaves  as  if  in  normal  sleep. 


This  unconscious  mind  is  much  nearer  the  surface  in  some  people  than  in 
others.  While  the  average  reader  thinks  of  hypnotism  only  in  terms  of  the 
deepest  stage  or  somnambulism,  there  are  actually  many  degrees  of  the  trance. 
Only  one  person  in  every  five  has  the  unconscious  so  accessible  that  the 
conscious  can  be  completely  unseated  and  the  operator  deal  directly  with  the 
unconscious.  Yet  we  find  evidences  of  true  hypnotic  phenomena  in  almost 
everybody. 

Let  us  follow  the  procedure  of  the  operator  as  he  induces  hypnosis.  This  will 
serve  to  show  all  these  various  states  and  at  the  same  time  illustrate  one  method 
of  inducing  hypnosis,  the  method  most  in  favor  with  the  psychologist,  who 
prefers  the  quiet  of  his  laboratory  to  the  stage  of  the  "professional." 

Suggestion  is  his  key  and  relaxation  makes  the  subject  more  open  to 
suggestion.  So,  first  of  all,  he  has  his  subject  seated  comfortably  in  a  chair  or 
reclining  on  a  couch.  Then  he  "talks  sleep."  The  subject  is  asked  to  close  his 
eyes  and  the  operator  begins  somewhat  as  follows. 

"You  are  falling  sound  asleep.  Relax  all  your  muscles  and  imagine  that  you  are 
going  into  a  deep  sleep.  Deeper  and  deeper.  You  will  not  wake  up  until  I  tell 
you,  then  you  will  wake  up  quietly  and  you  will  always  feel  fine  as  a  result  of 
these  suggestions.  You  are  falling  sound,  sound  asleep.  Deeper  and  deeper, 
deeper  and  deeper."  The  hypnotist  continues  this  formula  for  about  five 
minutes  and  then  tries  the  first  and  simplest  test. 

"Listen  to  me.  Your  eyelids  are  locked  tightly  together.  Tight!  Tight!  Tight! 
Your  eyelids  are  locked  tightly  together  and  you  cannot  open  your  eyes  no 
matter  how  hard  you  may  try.  Your  eyelids  are  locked  tightly  together  and  you 
cannot  open  them.  You  may  try.  I  dare  you!" 

Then  something  very  curious  may  happen.  The  subject  is  still  wide  "awake"  in 
the  sense  that  his  conscious  mind  hears  everything  and  remembers  everything 
afterward.  Yet  for  some  reason  or  other  he  cannot  get  those  eyes  open,  struggle 
as  he  will.  He  seems  to  forget  which  muscles  to  use,  and  raises  his  eyebrows  in 
hopeless  efforts  to  succeed.  The  operator  is  getting  his  first  control  over  the 
unconscious  and  this  control  we  can  see  progressing  in  definite  steps.  It  is  much 
easier,  for  example,  to  influence  certain  small  muscle  groups,  say  the  eyes  or 
the  throat,  than  larger  muscles  as  those  in  the  arms  or  legs,  while  any  attempt  to 
get  hallucinations-visions-at  this  stage  would  almost  certainly  fail.  We  will  find 
that,  on  this  first  trial,  roughly  one  half  of  the  subjects  cannot  open  the  eyes, 
while  this  percentage  improves  as  we  repeat  attempts  at  hypnosis.  In  the  long 


run,  after,  say  a  dozen  trials,  about  ninety  per  cent  of  humanity  will  reach  the 
stage  when  they  cannot  open  their  eyes. 


The  remaining  ten  per  cent  will  generally  report  that  they  feel  rested,  relaxed, 
or  sleepy,  but  will  deny  any  real  effects.  Probably  this  feeling  of  relaxation  and 
general  sleepiness  should  be  considered  as  one  of  the  hypnotic  phenomena  at 
this  very  early  stage,  but  it  is  hard  to  demonstrate,  whereas  eye-closure  is  quite 
definite. 

However,  we  must  note  that  whereas  the  hypnotist  can  get  this  closing  of  the 
eyes  in  ninety  per  cent  of  humanity,  this  does  not  necessarily  mean  that  he  can 
go  any  farther  with  his  suggestions.  He  may  and  again  he  may  not.  That  seems 
to  depend  almost  entirely  on  the  subject.  There  are  many  of  these  in  whom  it  is 
easy  to  induce  eye-closure,  but  quite  impossible  to  get  any  tests  which  indicate 
a  deeper  stage  of  hypnotism.  No  matter  how  hard  the  hypnotist  may  try  he  can 
make  no  progress  beyond  this  very  elementary  state  and  psychology  is  quite  at 
a  loss  to  explain  why.  Susceptibility  to  hypnosis  seems  to  depend  on  certain 
personality  traits  which  we  do  not  know  and  cannot  influence. 

Should  the  hypnotist  succeed  in  this  first  test  with  the  eyes,  he  may  proceed  at 
once  to  one  which  indicates  a  somewhat  deeper  state,  such  as  stiffening  of  the 
arm.  He  will  end  eyeclosure  and  continue  somewhat  as  follows. 

"Now,  relax  everything.  Relax  your  eye  muscles.  They  are  returning  to  normal. 
You  are  sound,  sound  asleep  and  will  not  awaken  until  I  tell  you.  Then  you  will 
awaken  quietly  and  easily.  Relax  everything.  I  am  now  about  to  make  another 
test.  Your  right  arm  is  becoming  stiff  and  rigid  at  your  side.  Stiff  and  rigid.  The 
muscles  are  tightening  up.  It  is  stiff  and  rigid  as  an  iron  bar.  Stiff  and  rigid.  You 
cannot  bend  your  right  arm.  It  is  impossible  to  bend  your  right  arm.  You  may 
try.  I  dare  you." 

Once  again  we  may  see  that  weird  condition  in  which  the  patient  is  quite 
helpless  to  meet  the  challenge.  He  jerks  the  arm  around  with  a  curious  sort  of 
tremor  and  does  his  best,  but  his  best  produces  no  results.  The  arm  remains  stiff 
and  rigid. 

Or  he  may  meet  the  challenge  quite  successfully,  relax  his  arm  and  open  his 
eyes.  In  this  case  he  has  broken  any  influence  we  might  have  had.  But  even  if 
he  cannot  bend  his  arm,  this  fact  guarantees  nothing  as  to  his  going  deeper.  As 
in  the  case  of  eye-closure,  he  may  be  wide  awake  and  remember  everything 
perfectly  after  the  seance.  The  suggestions  of  the  hypnotist  have  been 


successful  up  to  this  point.  Beyond  it  he  may  be  quite  unable  to  make  further 
progress. 


If  successful,  another  test  is  in  order.  Various  operators  will  use  different  tests 
in  different  sequences  but  the  idea  is  the  same  at  this  early  stage,  namely  to 
involve  larger  and  larger  groups  of  muscles  in  these  induced  paralyses.  The 
next  move  might  easily  be  something  like  this.  First  of  all  we  must  remove  the 
effects  of  the  previous  test.  So  we  say: 

"Relax,  relax  your  right  arm.  It  is  returning  to  normal.  Your  right  arm  is  resting 
quietly  at  your  side  and  there  is  no  strain  whatsoever.  You  are  sound,  sound 
asleep.  Deeper  and  deeper.  Deeper  and  deeper.  You  are  losing  all  control  over 
your  body.  Your  body  is  floating  away  and  you  can  no  longer  control  your 
muscles.  For  example,  it  is  quite  impossible  for  you  to  stand  up.  You  are  stuck 
in  your  chair  and  it  is  quite  impossible  for  you  to  stand  erect.  You  may  try  but 
you  cannot.  I  dare  you." 

And  the  subject  either  does  or  he  does  not.  He  may  pull  himself  together,  even 
if  the  other  tests  have  succeeded,  open  his  eyes  and  stagger  to  his  feet.  On  the 
other  hand,  he  may  make  ineffective  efforts  to  arise,  then  decide  it  is  useless 
and  relax  in  his  chair. 

In  all  these  early  stages  of  hypnotism  we  notice  a  curious  lethargy,  an 
unwillingness  on  the  subject's  part  to  exert  himself.  Very  frequently,  when  we 
dare  the  subject  to  open  his  eyes,  bend  his  arm  or  stand  up,  he  makes  no  effort 
whatsoever.  If  we  question  him  afterward,  we  find  that  he  heard  the  challenge, 
was  certain  that  he  could  move  the  muscles  in  question  if  he  wished  to,  but  he 
just  couldn't  be  bothered  to  try.  He  was  feeling  quite  comfortable  and  wished  to 
remain  so. 

This  must  be  listed  as  one  of  the  earliest  and  best  signs  of  success  in  inducing 
the  hypnotic  trance.  It  is  a  very  significant  cue  which  the  experienced  operator 
never  overlooks,  for  it  is  not  what  one  would  expect  if  there  were  no  influence. 
For  example,  suppose  a  hypnotist  goes  up  to  a  gentleman  sitting  quietly  in  a 
hotel  lobby  and  suddenly  says: 

"Mr.  Smith.  You  cannot  stand  up.  Your  legs  are  paralyzed.  No  matter  how  hard 
you  may  try  you  cannot  leave  that  chair."  Mr.  Smith,  once  he  had  recovered 
from  his  astonishment  would  probably  stand  up  immediately  and  call  the  hotel 
management  for  protection  against  this  madman.” 


But  the  hypnotic  subject  adopts  an  entirely  different  attitude.  Not  only  does  he 
think  the  operator's  actions  quite  reasonable,  but  he  makes  no  effort  at  all  to 
assert  his  own  independence.  This  curious  lethargy,  found  in  many  people, 
generally  indicates  that  the  individual  will  become  a  good  subject. 

Should  the  operator  be  successful  up  to  this  point,  he  will  proceed  with  the  next 
step.  He  has  demonstrated,  to  his  satisfaction,  that  he  can  control  the  voluntary 
muscles,  small  and  large,  but  this  does  not  necessarily  mean  that  he  is  dealing 
with  a  good  subject,  a  somnambulist.  He  still  has  several  steps  to  make.  Next 
he  will  try  automatic  movements,  talking  to  the  subject  somewhat  as  follows: 

"You  are  sound,  sound  asleep,  going  deeper  and  deeper.  Now,  listen  carefully.  I 
am  about  to  start  your  hands  rotating  one  around  the  other.  Here  they  go,  round 
and  round,  faster  and  faster.  Keep  them  moving.  They  are  rotating  faster  and 
faster,  faster  and  faster.  You  cannot  stop  them.  No  matter  how  hard  you  try, 
you  cannot  stop  your  hands  from  going  around." 

As  in  the  previous  tests  we  may  get  any  one  of  three  re  actions.  The  subject 
may  be  able  to  resist  the  suggestion,  stop  his  hands,  and  remain  quiet.  Or  he 
may  simply  allow  them  to  continue  rotating,  obviously  making  no  effort  to  stop 
them.  This  is  the  type  of  reaction  we  mentioned  in  which  the  subject  simply 
cannot  be  bothered  to  make  the  effort.  Finally,  he  may  try  unsuccessfully  to 
stop  them,  stiffening  up  the  muscles  in  all  sorts  of  curious  ways,  bumping  his 
hands  together,  even  gripping  his  coat  in  an  unsuccessful  effort  to  bring  the 
movement  to  an  end. 

These  automatic  movements,  as  they  are  called,  generally  indicate  a  fairly  deep 
stage  of  hypnotism.  For  some  reason,  they  are  much  more  difficult  to  obtain 
than  mere  paralysis  or  stiffening  of  any  muscle  or  muscle  group.  When 
obtained  they  generally  signify  that  the  individual  will  be  a  very  good  subject, 
but  this  is  not  always  the  case.  As  before,  many  subjects  will  come  to  even  this 
state  of  hypnosis  and  go  no  farther.  The  conscious  mind  refuses  to  relinquish  its 
control  and  the  subject  will  awake,  quite  aware  of  everything  that  has  taken 
place.  This  type  of  enforced  activity  can  apply  to  any  set  of  muscles,  even  those 
of  speech.  We  can  say  to  the  subject,  "Repeat  after  me  the  words  'Mary  had  a 
little  lamb.1  Now  repeat  it  by  yourself.  Keep  it  up.  You  cannot  stop  it.  You  must 
keep  repeating  that  sentence."  And,  in  many  cases,  the  subject  will  do  as  we 
have  suggested. 

If  the  operator  has  met  with  success  up  to  this  point,  he  will  now  suspect  that  he 
has  a  really  good  subject  with  which  to  deal  and  will  try  for  somnambulism,  the 
deepest  form  of  the  hypnotic  trance.  After  he  has  convinced  himself  that  the 


automatic  movements  are  genuine  or  that  the  subject  is  too  deep  in  hypnosis  to 
even  make  the  effort  to  resist,  he  may  proceed  somewhat  as  follows: 

"Now  I  am  going  to  ask  you  a  few  very  simple  questions.  You  are  sound  asleep 
and  will  answer  me  in  your  sleep,  talking  as  you  have  heard  many  of  your 
friends  talk  in  their  sleep.  You  will  not  wake  up  and  will  have  no  trouble  at  all 
in  answering  my  questions." 

It  is  always  well  to  repeat  instructions  several  times  so  as  to  be  sure  that  the 
subject  understands.  Then  the  operator  will  ask  some  very  simple  questions, 
such  as: 

"Tell  me,  what  is  your  home  address?"  "Where  were  you  on  your  vacation  last 
summer?"  "How  many  brothers  and  sisters  have  you  ?" 

Questions  which  have  any  emotional  tone  or  which  the  subject  may  be 
unwilling  to  answer  for  any  reason  whatsoever  should  be  carefully  avoided  at 
this  early  stage.  The  subject  may  easily  awaken  from  this  first  light  trance,  have 
a  vague  memory  of  what  has  happened  and  refuse  to  have  anything  more  to  do 
with  hypnotism.  Even  if  he  does  not  remember  what  has  occurred,  the 
unpleasantness  of  the  situation  may  still  hang  over  in  a  vague  sort  of  way,  and 
make  it  difficult  to  obtain  full  cooperation  in  the  future. 

Next,  the  operator  may  decide  to  have  the  subject  stand  up  and  walk  around  the 
room.  This  is  accomplished  by  means  of  suggestion,  which  is  the  key  to 
hypnotism.  "You  will  now  stand  up.  You  will  not  wake  up  until  I  tell  you,  but 
will  stand  up,  walking  in  your  sleep  as  you  have  undoubtedly  seen  many  sleep 
walkers.  You  will  find  no  difficulty  at  all  in  using  your  muscles  but  will  remain 
sound  asleep.  Now,  stand  up."  And  the  operator  helps  the  subject  to  his  feet. 
Should  the  subject  not  wake  up  under  this  last  test,  we  may  be  pretty  sure  that 
he  is  now  in  somnambulism,  although  a  few  subjects  will  cooperate  very  nicely 
up  to  this  point  but  awaken  when  asked  to  move  about.  They  may  even  walk 
around,  obviously  in  hypnotism  and  still  retain  a  fairly  clear  memory  of  what 
has  happened  after  the  seance  is  completed. 

In  general,  we  accept  the  hallucination  as  the  final  test  of  hypnotism.  We  can 
hallucinate  any  of  the  senses  but  the  most  common  type  is  that  of  sight,  the 
“vision”  We  proceed  somewhat  as  follows: 

"Listen  carefully.  When  I  give  the  word  you  will  open  your  eyes  but  you  will 
not  wake  up.  You  are  still  walking  in  your  sleep.  You  will  not  wake  up.  You 
will  see  standing  on  the  table  in  front  of  you  a  very  friendly  black  cat.  You  will 


go  over,  pet  the  cat,  then  lift  it  up  carefully  and  put  it  on  the  chair  in  which  you 
have  been  seated."  We  repeat  these  instructions  several  times,  then  say,  "Now 
open  your  eyes.  Open  your  eyes.  There  is  the  cat." 

This  test  is  more  or  less  crucial.  The  subject  must  be  in  deep  somnambulism  if 
he  is  to  be  subject  to  these  hallucinations  or  visions.  Should  he  not  see  the  cat, 
then  the  shock  of  opening  his  eyes  will  probably  awaken  him  completely  and 
the  seance  is  over.  Should  he  really  have  a  vision  of  the  cat,  his  actions  will  be 
characteristic.  He  will  pet  the  animal  and  play  with  it  in  so  convincing  a  fashion 
that  the  operator  need  have  no  doubt  as  to  what  has  really  happened.  The 
subject  is  in  deep  somnambulism  and  will  remember  nothing  on  awakening. 

Actually  there  can  be  many  a  curious  twist  which  will  deceive  even  a  trained 
hypnotist.  The  writer  was  demonstrating  hypnotism  before  a  group  of  medical 
students.  The  time  was  short,  so  it  was  agreed  that  he  would  take  one  of  the 
men  and  simply  go  through  the  motions.  The  subject  would  cooperate  and  take 
the  tests  to  the  best  of  his  ability,  simply  to  provide  a  demonstration  for  the 
others  of  how  hypnotism  was  produced. 

We  ran  through  the  tests  rapidly  right  up  to  hallucinations.  Here  the  writer  said 
to  the  subject,  "Now  open  your  eyes.  There  is  an  apple  in  my  hand.  Take  it  and 
eat  it."  The  subject  promptly  opened  his  eyes,  grinned,  and  said,  "There's  a 
worm  in  it."  The  operator  took  it  for  granted  he  was  wide  awake,  asked  him  to 
sit  down  and  continued  his  talk. 

But  when  he  dismissed  the  group,  his  demonstration  subject  remained  seated, 
with  his  eyes  wide  open  but  unable  to  move.  "Wake  me  up,  will  you,"  he  said, 

"I  can't  move."  So  the  operator  waked  him  up  in  proper  fashion.  The  operator 
must  never  take  anything  for  granted  in  hypnotism,  but  must  be  quite  certain 
that  his  subject  is  wide  awake  before  leaving. 

This  is  a  very  important  point  in  technique.  Let  us  suppose  that  the  subject  has 
arrived  at  somnambulism  and  the  hypnotist  wishes  to  end  the  seance.  He 
awakens  the  subject  by  some  such  means  as  the  following:  "I  will  now  count  to 
five.  By  the  time  I  get  to  five  you  will  be  wide  awake  and  feeling  fine.  Wide 
awake  and  feeling  fine.  One,  you  are  waking  up;  two,  you  are  waking  up;  three, 
you  are  almost  awake;  four,  you  are  nearly  awake;  five,  you  are  awake." 

Even  if  the  subject  should  awaken  by  himself  in  any  of  the  tests  leading  up  to 
somnambulism,  it  is  nevertheless  a  good  plan,  after  he  opens  his  eyes,  to  assure 
him,  "All  right,  you're  awake  now.  Wide  awake  and  feeling  fine."  This  very 


simple  precaution  may  appear  a  little  silly  in  many  cases  but  it  is  always  well  to 
be  sure. 

We  hear  a  great  deal  about  the  subject  refusing  to  awaken  from  hypnotism. 

This  appears  to  be  a  continual  dread  of  people  who  are  learning  to  hypnotize. 
What  do  they  do  if  the  subject  will  not  awaken?  If  the  operator  will  follow 
some  such  technique  as  we  have  outlined,  this  problem  will  never  present  itself. 
Throughout  the  entire  seance  we  keep  stressing  the  idea,  "You  will  not  wake  up 
until  you  are  told.  Then  you  will  awaken  quietly  and  easily." 

Should  the  patient  refuse  to  awaken-the  writer  has  never  had  such  a  case-the 
proper  procedure  is  to  allow  him  to  remain  quietly  in  the  trance.  The  hypnotic 
"sleep"  will  change  over  to  natural  sleep  and  sooner  or  later  the  subject  will 
awaken  by  himself.  But  experience  will  soon  teach  the  operator  that  his  real 
problem  is  to  get  his  subject  into  hypnotism,  not  get  him  out  of  it. 

That  is  the  reason  we  insert  the  phrase,  "You  will  not  wake  up  until  you  are 
told."  Some  subjects  have  the  habit,  why  we  do  not  know,  of  suddenly  opening 
their  eyes  in  the  very  midst  of  the  seance  and  awakening  completely.  They 
seem  just  as  surprised  as  the  operator,  but  undoubtedly  there  is  some  very  good 
reason  for  this  state  of  affairs.  The  following  case  is  a  good  example. 

The  writer  was  hypnotizing  a  young  man  who  gave  all  the  signs  of  being  an 
excellent  subject.  Everything  went  very  nicely  until  the  operator  said,  "I  am 
now  going  to  ask  you  a  few  simple  questions  which  you  will  answer." 
Immediately,  the  subject  was  wide  awake,  trembling  violently  with  every  sign 
of  intense  fear.  This  was  odd,  so  the  operator  repeated  the  seance  with  exactly 
the  same  result.  Then  the  explanation  dawned  on  him.  So  the  next  time,  before 
asking  any  questions,  he  said,  "Listen  carefully.  There  it  nothing  to  fear.  I  am  in 
no  way  interested  in  your  private  affairs.  I  wish  to  ask  you  a  few  very  simple 
questions  simply  to  show  that  you  are  in  touch  with  me,  that  you  are  listening 
to  me.  If  you  do  not  wish  to  answer  any  particular  question,  just  shake  your 
head,  but  I  assure  you  that  I  am  not  going  to  ask  intentionally  any  question 
which  could  possibly  embarrass  you.  Is  that  clear?" 

He  nodded  his  head  and  everything  progressed  in  proper  order  from  that  point. 
Obviously  it  was  the  proverbial  case  of  the  guilty  conscience.  The  subject 
feared  the  operator  was  going  to  pry  into  his  secrets  and  awakened  in  order  to 
protect  himself. 

The  writer  has  described  the  hypnotic  technique  most  used  in  the  psychological 
laboratory  but  there  are  endless  variations  to  this  particular  procedure,  and 


several  other  entirely  different  techniques  which  are  equally  effective.  With  this 
particular  attack,  for  example,  many  operators  prefer  to  start  with  the  subject's 
eyes  wide  open,  waiting  until  he  closes  them  from  natural  fatigue.  So  far  as  the 
writer  can  see,  it  makes  very  little  difference  if  we  start  with  the  eyes  open  or 
closed.  He  prefers  to  start  with  them  closed. 

Then  the  writer  himself  would  not  use  the  technique  as  he  has  outlined  it.  He 
awakens  the  subject  after  each  test  and  starts  all  over  again.  A  much  slower 
approach,  to  be  sure,  but  one  which  gives  the  operator  ample  opportunity  to 
size  up  his  subject  and  adopt  his  attack  to  any  peculiarities  the  subject  may 
have. 

We  will  see  later  that,  on  occasion,  subjects  do  curious  things  which  can  be 
very  disconcerting  to  an  operator.  The  writer  prefers  his  slower,  more 
deliberate  approach  because  it  enables  him  to  meet  these  peculiarities  at  the 
earliest  possible  moment.  But  most  operators  would  consider  him  overcautious. 
The  writer  also  would  never  spend  more  than  five  minutes  at  any  one  seance  in 
this  early  stage  of  the  game,  but  he  knows  of  excellent  operators  who  will 
hammer  right  along  for  one  hour  if  necessary  in  an  effort  to  get  somnambulism 
at  the  very  first  effort.  And,  of  course,  operators  may  vary  the  order  of  the  tests 
and  use  different  muscle  groups.  Speech  muscles  instead  of  eyes,  inability  to 
move  a  leg  as  opposed  to  an  arm,  or  other  substitutions. 

But  it  all  adds  up  to  the  same  thing.  If  we  use  the  "sleeping"  technique  the 
approach  is  slow,  calm,  and  monotonous.  The  reader  will  note  a  complete 
absence  of  many  things  which  popular  opinion  links  with  the  hypnotist.  We 
have  described  a  procedure  which  anyone  can  master.  There  is  no  mention  at 
all  of  "will  power,"  for  it  has  nothing  to  do  with  hypnotism.  The  operator  does 
not  dominate  the  weaker  will  of  his  subject  and  beat  him  into  submission  with 
his  "dark,  hypnotic  eye."  Quite  the  contrary.  He  does  his  best  to  persuade  the 
subject  to  cooperate,  making  it  quite  '  clear  that  success  is  very  difficult  without 
this  cooperation  on  the  part  of  the  individual  in  question.  We  will  see  later  that 
a  subject  can  very  easily  be  hypnotized  against  his  will  but  that  this  again  has 
nothing  to  do  with  will  power  on  the  part  of  the  operator. 

We  have  not  mentioned  the  famous  hypnotic  pass  because  this  also  is  quite 
unnecessary,  a  hang-over  from  those  early  days  of  hypnotism  during  American 
Revolutionary  times  when  Mesmer  was  passing  his  "magnetic  fluid"  into  the 
bodies  of  his  patients,  and  Benjamin  Franklin  with  others  in  Paris  was  exposing 
Mesmer  as  a  fraud. 


Nor  are  there  any  special,  intricate  techniques  which  have  to  be  mastered. 
Hypnotism  has  nothing  of  mystery  in  its  nature.  A  small  corner  of  science,  it  is 
open  to  all  who  are  willing  to  use  the  necessary  care  in  mastering  a  technique 
and  persistence  in  applying  the  same. 

In  America  we  have  been  a  little  unfortunate  in  our  introduction  to  hypnotism. 
Most  of  us  have  made  its  acquaintance  via  the  stage  and  the  "professional," 
whereas  in  Europe  these  public  exhibitions  of  hypnotism  are  generally  not 
allowed.  As  a  result  we  find  there  in  almost  every  town  of  any  size  some  doctor 
who  is  an  authority  on  the  subject  and  uses  it  as  needed  in  his  practice. 

But  with  us  the  medical  profession  fights  shy  of  hypnotism,  knowing  full  well 
that  any  individual  who  starts  using  hypnotism  in  his  practice  becomes 
associated  in  the  public's  mind  with  the  stage  artist,  the  quack.  Even  his 
companions  in  medicine  look  on  him  as  a  little  queer,  so  that  in  America 
hypnotism  has  died  a  very  natural  death,  so  far  as  medicine  is  concerned. 
However,  this  very  neglect  on  the  part  of  the  doctor  has  turned  out  for  the  best. 
It  has  forced  hypnotism  back  into  the  psychological  laboratory  where  the 
psychologist,  with  a  much  greater  range  of  interest  than  his  medical  compatriot, 
has  been  doing  some  very  excellent  work  during  the  past  twenty  years. 

For  the  time  being,  however,  this  public  prejudice  is  still  very  strong.  The 
writer  is  especially  anxious  to  present  hypnotism  to  the  reader  as  a  branch  of 
science  quite  divorced  from  mystery  and  from  the  supernatural.  Certainly 
nothing  we  have  presented  in  our  technique  for  inducing  hypnotism  savors  of 
the  "black  art"  and  we  can  assure  the  reader  that  the  following  pages  will  be 
just  as  free  of  any  suggestion  of  the  mystic. 

There  are  many  ways  of  producing  the  seance,  so  let  us  examine  a  technique  at 
the  opposite  extreme  from  that  we  have  described.  The  stage  hypnotist  breaks 
every  condition  which  would  seem  to  be  necessary  to  the  psychologist  in  his 
laboratory,  but,  strange  to  say,  he  is  just  as  successful  as  is  the  true  scientist. 
"The  brighter  the  lights,  the  bigger  the  crowd,  the  better  the  success"  as  one 
professional  put  it.  Obviously,  then,  quiet  and  relaxation  are  not  necessary  to 
the  induction  of  hypnosis. 

The  following  is  fairly  typical  of  the  technique  employed  by  the  stage 
performer.  He  has  the  subject  stand  erect  with  his  feet  close  together  and 
proceeds  somewhat  as  follows:  "Stand  erect  and  listen  carefully  to  my  voice. 
Close  your  eyes.  Just  imagine  that  you  are  a  board  standing  on  end.  You  are  a 
board  standing  on  end  and  you  are  falling  back.  You  are  falling  backward  into 
my  arms.  Falling  back,  back,  back.  Let  yourself  go.  I  will  catch  you.  You  are 


falling  back,  back,  back.  You  are  losing  your  balance  and  are  falling 
backward."  At  this  point  the  subject  generally  loses  his  balance  and  does  fall 
backward.  The  operator  promptly  stands  him  on  his  feet  again  and  at  once 
returns  to  the  attack,  this  time  standing  in  front  of  the  subject.  "Look  into  my 
eyes  and  clasp  your  hands  together.  Clasp  your  hands  together  firmly.  Make  an 
effort  and  put  some  muscle  into  those  fingers.  Clasp  your  hands  together 
firmly,  firmly.  Your  hands  are  locked  together.  Your  hands  are  locked  tightly 
together.  You  cannot  take  your  hands  apart  no  matter  how  hard  you  may  try. 
Your  hands  are  locked  firmly  together.  I  dare  you.  You  cannot  take  your  hands 
apart." 

If  he  is  dealing  with  a  good  subject  the  hands  will  be  stuck  together  and  it  will 
be  impossible  for  him  to  take  them  apart.  So  the  hypnotist  proceeds  at  once. 

"All  right.  Relax.  You  can  take  your  hands  apart.  Keep  looking  in  my  eyes. 

Now  open  your  mouth.  Stiffen  up  your  jaw  muscles.  Your  jaws  are  stiff  and 
locked  in  place.  It  is  impossible  for  you  to  close  your  jaws.  Absolutely 
impossible.  You  cannot  pronounce  your  own  name.  Your  jaws  are  locked  in 
place  and  you  cannot  pronounce  your  own  name.  It  is  impossible  for  you  to 
pronounce  your  own  name.  All  right.  Relax." 

The  hypnotist  gives  his  subject  no  time  to  recover  his  poise,  but  returns  to  the 
attack  at  once.  "Keep  looking  into  my  eyes.  Stiffen  out  your  right  leg.  Stiffen  it 
out.  Your  right  leg  is  stiff  and  rigid.  You  cannot  move  it.  You  cannot  take  even 
one  step  forward.  Your  right  leg  is  stiff,  rigid,  and  useless.  You  are  rooted  to 
the  ground.  You  cannot  move.  All  right,  relax." 

But  the  operator  gives  him  no  time  to  relax.  Immediately  he  begins  on  his  next 
move.  "Close  your  eyes.  The  lids  are  locked  tightly  together.  You  cannot  open 
your  eyes.  They  are  firmly  closed.  You  are  now  falling  backward  into  my  arms. 
Let  yourself  go.  You  are  falling  back  into  my  arms."  The  subject  falls  backward 
and  the  operator  eases  him  down  onto  the  floor  or  into  a  chair,  and  continues. 
"You  are  asleep.  Sound,  sound  asleep,  just  as  if  you  have  taken  chloroform  or 
ether.  You  are  sound,  sound  asleep.  Deeper  and  deeper.  Deeper  and  deeper. 

You  are  sound,  sound  asleep."  The  operator  continues  in  this  vein  for  a  minute 
or  two,  then  at  once  shifts  the  subject  over  to  active  somnambulism. 

"Stand  up.  You  are  sound  asleep,  walking  in  your  sleep.  Now  open  your  eyes, 
but  remain  asleep.  Look.  There  is  an  elephant  standing  over  there.  Here  is  a 
gun."  He  hands  the  subject  a  broom.  "Now,  go  stalk  the  elephant.  Remember  he 
is  a  dangerous  beast  and  you  must  take  advantage  of  every  bit  of  cover." 
Thereupon  the  subject  proceeds  to  creep  up  on  the  supposed  elephant,  hiding 


behind  chairs,  tables  or  bits  of  scenery  until  he  finally  shoots  the  animal  with  a 
loud  "bang"  and  proceeds  to  examine  the  corpse. 

From  this  point  the  professional  will  probably  go  through  the  usual  stage 
procedure,  have  his  subject  fish  for  whales  in  a  goldfish  jar,  bark  all  around  the 
stage  on  all  fours,  give  a  Fourth  of  July  speech  and  finally  awaken  his  very 
embarrassed  subject  just  as  he  is  about  to  remove  most  of  his  clothes.  It  is  this 
sort  of  thing  which  has  given  hypnotism  such  a  bad  name  with  the  average 
American,  who  always  feels  that  somehow  it  is  linked  with  sleight  of  hand  and 
"magic"  in  general. 

We  may  condemn  the  stage  artist  for  bringing  the  subject  into  such  disrepute, 
but  we  must  admit  that  he  gets  results.  The  reader  will  also  be  impressed  with 
the  fact  that  his  method  of  attack  stands  out  in  sharp  contradiction  to  that 
previously  described  in  almost  every  respect.  Those  conditions  of  quiet 
relaxation  on  which  the  psychologist  insists  are  conspicuous  by  their  absence. 
Nor  is  he  in  any  way  worried  about  having  the  cooperation  of  his  victim.  After 
the  first  half  minute  he  runs  things  his  own  way,  outraging  the  subject's  dignity 
and  good  taste  in  every  possible  manner. 

It  is  well  to  bear  this  stage  technique  in  mind  when  we  consider  the  real  nature 
of  hypnotism  in  Chapter  III.  Most  psychologists  are  either  unfamiliar  with  his 
technique  or  ignore  it  completely.  If  they  numbered  one  or  two  of  these 
professionals  among  their  friends,  they  would  not  fall  into  some  very  common 
errors  as  to  theory. 

The  stage  operator  will  vary  this  technique  indefinitely  but  his  underlying 
theme  is  always  the  same.  A  high  pressure  attack  which  more  or  less  aims  at 
throwing  the  subject  off  balance.  Then  a  rapid  and  continuous  follow-up  which 
does  not  give  the  subject  time  to  recover  himself.  But  we  should  note  that,  for 
all  his  extravagant  claims,  he  ends  with  just  the  same  proportion  of 
somnambulists  as  does  the  psychologist;  namely,  one  in  five. 

The  two  techniques  we  have  described  up  to  the  present,  with  their  endless 
variations,  represent  those  most  commonly  used  to  induce  hypnotism,  but  there 
are  others.  One,  for  example,  simply  aims  at  transforming  natural  sleep  into  the 
hypnotic  variety.  The  method  of  procedure  here  is  somewhat  as  follows:  The 
operator  seats  himself  beside  the  sleeping  subject  and  begins  talking  in  a  very 
low  voice.  "Listen  to  me.  I  am  talking  to  you  and  you  will  answer  in  your  sleep. 
You  will  talk  to  me  in  your  sleep  just  as  you  have  often  heard  others  talk,  but 
you  will  not  wake  up.  You  are  sound  asleep  but  you  hear  my  voice  clearly  in 
your  unconscious  mind."  The  operator  gradually  raises  his  voice,  puts  his  hand 


on  the  subject's  head  to  further  attract  attention,  and  when  his  voice  has  risen  to 
normal  volume,  say  after  five  minutes,  he  asks  the  subject  some  very  simple 
question,  such  as  "Where  do  you  live?" 

In  general,  the  operator  has  to  press  repeatedly  for  an  answer  until  one  of  two 
things  happen.  Either  the  subject  awakens,  and  this  will  occur  in  four-fifths  of 
the  cases  or  the  subject  starts  talking  in  his  sleep.  When  this  occurs,  the 
hypnotist  proceeds  as  he  would  with  any  other  somnambulist,  has  the  subject 
stand  up,  walk  around  the  room,  open  his  eyes,  see  hallucinations  and  finally 
return  to  bed  with  the  suggestion  that  he  will  sleep  soundly  until  morning  and 
awaken  at  the  usual  time.  For  obvious  reasons,  this  technique  is  very  limited  in 
its  possibilities  for  use,  yet  under  certain  conditions,  as  in  a  hospital,  it  does 
present  very  definite  advantages. 

At  this  point  it  would  be  well  to  mention  the  "disguised"  technique.  The  reader 
will  have  noted  that  when  the  operator  changes  normal  sleep  into  the  hypnotic 
trance,  the  subject  has  nothing  to  say  in  the  matter.  This  raises  the  interesting 
and  very  important  question  as  to  whether  anyone  can  be  hypnotized  against  his 
will  and  the  answer  is  "certainly."  If  we  wished,  we  could  quibble  as  to  whether 
transfer  from  sleep  to  trance  was  hypnotism  "against  the  will"  or  only 
hypnotism  "without  the  consent"  of  the  subject.  Not  a  very  important  point 
because  the  subject  may  definitely  refuse  to  have  anything  to  do  with  hypnosis 
in  his  waking  state  yet  this  sleep  transfer  method  would  still  work.  This,  it 
seems,  would  be  definitely  against  his  will. 

However,  there  are  certain  places  in  which  hypnotism  might  be  used  where  it 
would  have  to  be  employed  without  the  consent  of  the  hypnotized.  Such  would 
be  the  use  of  hypnotism  in  the  detection  of  crime  or  in  warfare.  A  prisoner  in 
jail  or  after  a  battle  certainly  would  not  willingly  cooperate  with  the  hypnotist  if 
he  knew  the  operator  was  after  information  which  might  send  him  to  the 
electric  chair  or  which  would  put  him  in  the  light  of  a  traitor  to  his  country.  So 
here  we  employ  the  disguised  technique.  We  hypnotize  the  subject  without  his 
realizing  what  is  happening.  We  ask  his  cooperation  in  a  harmless  little 
psychological  experiment  using  some  piece  of  psychological  apparatus  as  a 
front  behind  which  to  work.  Perhaps  the  simplest  is  the  device  for  measuring 
blood  pressure.  We  explain  to  the  subject  that  we  wish  to  test  his  ability  to 
relax,  and  we  can  measure  this  by  his  blood  pressure.  That  sounds  very 
reasonable  so  we  fix  the  rubber  band  on  his  arm,  tell  him  to  close  his  eyes  and 
relax  all  his  muscles. 

We  further  explain  that,  of  course,  the  deepest  form  of  relaxation  is  sleep,  and 
that  if  the  subject  can  fall  asleep  it  will  show  that  he  has  perfect  control  over  his 


nervous  system.  Then  we  proceed  to  "talk  sleep"  much  the  same  as  in 
hypnotism,  being  careful  to  avoid  any  references  to  trances,  seances  or 
hypnotism,  and  omitting  all  tests  except  one.  After  five  minutes,  during  which 
period  we  have  checked  several  times  on  the  blood  pressure  to  keep  up  the 
delusion,  we  tell  the  subject  that  we  would  like  to  see  if  he  can  talk  in  his  sleep, 
since  this  represents  the  very  deepest  form  of  relaxation.  If  he  does,  he  is  in 
deep  hypnosis.  If  he  does  not,  no  one  is  any  the  wiser  as  to  what  has  actually 
been  taking  place.  We  repeat  this  little  experiment  several  times  until  we  have 
obtained  results  or  convinced  ourselves  that  no  results  are  to  be  obtained. 

Should  the  authorities  ever  decide  to  use  hypnotism  extensively  either  in  the 
detection  of  crime  or  in  warfare,  this  disguised  technique  may  prove  extremely 
valuable.  Not  only  is  it  just  as  effective  as  any  other  made  of  attack,  but  it  is  of 
such  a  nature  that  very  few  laymen  would  recognize  it  as  anything  other  than 
what  it  purports  to  be;  namely,  an  experiment  to  measure  ability  at  relaxation. 
Moreover,  the  apparatus  used  can  vary  indefinitely.  The  so-called  lie  detector 
provides  an  excellent  screen  behind  which  to  work.  The  writer  finds  that  an 
ordinary  watch  with  which  to  take  pulse  rate  as  a  measure  of  relaxation  is  quite 
as  satisfactory. 

The  previous  paragraphs  also  illustrate  another  very  important  point  in  any 
consideration  of  hypnotism.  Science  is  eternally  on  the  move,  questioning, 
probing,  inquiring.  The  truth  of  yesterday  may  be  false  today.  Many  of  the 
older  hypnotists,  writing  around  1900  were  quite  definite  in  their  assertions  that 
no  one  could  be  hypnotized  against  his  will.  They  were  just  as  sure  that 
hypnotism  could  not  be  used  for  criminal  purposes,  and  they  were  quite  right, 
in  so  far  as  they  knew  hypnotism. 

But  these  early  authorities  were  almost  always  medical  men.  Their  interest  lay 
in  treating  the  weaknesses  of  the  human  machine.  To  them  such  questions  were 
merely  side  issues,  and  very  unpleasant  side  issues  at  that.  Hypnotism  was 
unpopular,  linked  in  the  public's  mind  with  black  magic  and  mysticism.  They 
felt  it  their  duty  to  defend  it  at  every  turn.  When  faced  with  these  very 
unpleasant  possibilities  they  settled  the  issue  with  a  few  experiments  which 
proved  their  own  point,  but  which  are  quite  worthless  from  the  viewpoint  of 
modern  psychology. 

The  subject,  armed  with  a  rubber  knife,  would  gladly  murder  his  victim.  Give 
him  a  steel  knife,  however,  and  he  would  recoil  in  horror.  The  subject  could  not 
be  hypnotized  when  he  made  up  his  mind  to  resist,  but  was  quite  easily  thrown 
into  the  trance  when  he  cooperated  with  the  operator. 


We  will  see,  in  later  pages,  that  all  this  proves  very  little.  Hypnotism  is  now 
investigated  in  the  laboratory  by  the  scientist.  He  cares  very  little  about  the 
popularity  of  his  subject  and  insists  on  a  thorough  investigation  of  every 
question.  To  be  sure,  the  facts  he  unearths  may  be  unpleasant.  Hypnotism  may 
be  a  very  dangerous  thing  in  the  hands  of  the  unscrupulous,  but  so  is  the 
aeroplane,  the  rifle,  the  disease  germ.  Science  wishes  to  know  the  facts.  Once 
discovered,  these  truths  are  handed  over  to  the  public.  If  that  public  uses  the 
aeroplane  to  drop  bombs,  rather  than  to  carry  passengers,  the  scientist  is  in  no 
way  to  blame.  So  with  hypnotism.  The  psychologist  seeks  to  unearth  the  truth. 
That  is  his  problem.  The  use  to  which  his  discoveries  may  be  put  is  something 
different  again  and  something  for  which  he  has  no  responsibility. 

Another  most  interesting  way  of  inducing  the  trance  is  by  means  of  the  victrola 
record.  The  operator  simply  dictates  his  technique  to  the  record,  plays  this  back 
to  the  subject  and  the  record  will  put  the  subject  into  hypnotism  just  as  well  as 
will  the  voice  of  the  hypnotist.  A  very  neat  example  of  how  little  "will  power," 
passes,  and  hypnotic  eyes  have  to  do  with  the  trance.  About  as  nonmystic  a 
procedure  as  anyone  could  wish. 

The  writer  prepared  one  of  the  first  of  these  records  with  the  assistance  of  the 
Victor  people  and  it  is  now  marketed  through  the  Marietta  Apparatus 
Company.  Many  others  have  since  made  their  appearance,  all  good  and 
generally  intended  for  some  specific  puipose.  It  is  now  so  very  easy  to  record 
the  human  voice  that  there  will  undoubtedly  be  a  great  future  for  this  technique. 
The  operator  will  prepare  a  definite  record  for  a  particular  subject,  instruct  him 
how  to  use  it  and  literally  apply  absent  treatment  in  the  best  sense  of  the  word. 

Yet  we  must  bear  in  mind  that  this  use  of  hypnotic  records  has  very  definite 
limitations.  The  record  is  excellent  for  purposes  of  instruction,  which  was  the 
reason  for  its  first  appearance.  It  is  very  useful  for  experimental  work,  where 
the  psychologist  in  his  laboratory  wishes  to  be  sure  that  his  subjects  are 
receiving  exactly  the  same  instructions  as  are  those  in  the  laboratory  of  a 
colleague  1,000  miles  away.  It  can  even  be  used  to  induce  hypnotism  the  very 
first  time. 

But  the  operator  should  always  be  present,  for  very  naturally  no  record,  no 
matter  how  skillfully  devised,  can  meet  the  various  emergencies  which  arise 
when  we  induce  the  trance.  Some  subjects  tend  to  become  hysterical,  some 
even  show  a  disposition  to  go  into  convulsions  and  some  others  are  difficult  to 
awaken.  The  victrola  record  cannot  handle  these  situations. 


However,  there  may  be  a  real  use  for  this  technique  after  the  subject  has  been 
hypnotized  several  times.  Then  it  might  be  very  useful  from  the  medical  angle, 
when  the  subject  is  being  treated  for,  say,  alcoholism  or  stammering.  The 
doctor  might  very  easily  prepare  a  record  for  such  a  subject,  aimed  at 
reinforcing  and  repeating  suggestions  already  given  in  the  hypnotic  trance. 

Such  a  record  would,  of  course,  be  so  arranged  that  it  would  also  awaken  the 
subject  from  the  trance. 

This  could  very  easily  be  arranged  and  would  be  a  great  convenience  to  both 
subject  and  doctor.  Hypnotism  is  notoriously  time  consuming  and  any  device 
which  could  meet  this  objection  might  make  it  far  more  acceptable  to  the 
average  medical  man.  We  will  deal  more  fully  with  these  proposals  in  a  later 
chapter.  There  is  always  that  very  interesting  possibility  of  hypnotism  over  the 
radio.  While  we  do  not  have  the  slightest  doubt  that  certain  members  of  the 
radio  audience  could  be  thrown  into  the  genuine  trance  by  a  hypnotist  using 
such  a  means  of  contact,  the  whole  thing  is  impractical.  The  operator  is  too  far 
removed  from  his  various  subjects  and  should  anything  go  amiss  the  chances 
for  trouble,  including  lawsuits,  would  be  infinite. 

It  is  very  possible  that  in  future  some  enterprising  company  may  devote  a 
period  to  broadcasting  health  suggestions,  which  the  audience  will  accept  in  the 
relaxed  state  and  which  might  be  very  helpful.  But  this  is  only  a  possibility  and 
something  for  the  future.  Up  to  the  present  nothing  has  been  done.  The 
proposal  is  open  to  many  practical  objections. 

In  future  pages  the  writer  will  point  out  that  we  are  often  quibbling  over  words. 
Hitler  is  an  excellent  hypnotist,  and  we  really  mean  that  statement  to  be  taken 
seriously.  We  will  see  that  his  technique  is  almost  identical  with  that  of  the 
stage  hypnotist,  that  the  underlying  psychology  is  the  same  and  the  results 
much  more  effective.  To  be  sure,  there  are  differences,  but  these  differences  are 
very  superficial.  So  we  do  have  hypnotism  of  a  very  effective  type  over  the 
radio  but  it  bears  another  label. 

There  has  been  a  great  deal  of  work  done  with  drugs  as  an  aid  to  hypnosis,  all 
to  practically  no  end.  It  would  seem  reasonable  to  the  reader  that  any  good 
anaesthetic,  say  ether,  should  make  almost  any  person  susceptible  to 
hypnotism.  The  subject  is  "unconscious"  in  both  states  so  what  gives  one 
should  produce  the  other.  Actually  the  subject  is  far  from  being  unconscious,  he 
is  not  "asleep"  as  so  many  people  assume  and  all  our  work  with  drugs  appears 
to  have  been  wasted  effort.  Perhaps  drugs  may  still  have  a  use  in  lowering 
resistance  discover  beforehand  who  these  very  susceptible  people  are.  The 
operator  would  then  save  himself  much  wasted  effort.  How  does  he  do  it?  The 


answer  is  unfortunately  all  too  definite.  It  cannot  be  done  at  least  in  the  present 
stage  of  our  work.  We  know  of  no  tests  which  will  foretell  with  any  degree  of 
accuracy  which  individuals  will  develop  into  really  good  subjects.  Much  work 
is  being  tried  along  these  lines  and  some  research  is  yielding  promising  results, 
as  that  at  the  Harvard  Psychological  Clinic.  The  fact  remains,  however,  that  we 
cannot  as  yet  use  any  tests  here  with  anything  like  certainty. 

We  can,  however,  save  ourselves  a  great  deal  of  work  if  we  follow  certain 
leads.  In  general,  the  individual  who  talks  in  his  sleep  will  be  a  good  subject. 
The  person  who  walks  in  his  sleep,  the  "natural"  somnambulist,  will  almost 
always  go  into  "artificial"  somnambulism  or  deep  hypnosis.  The  feebleminded 
are  notoriously  hard  to  hypnotize,  as  are  also  same  classes  of  the  insane,  as  the 
schizophrenics.  But  the  hysteric  on  the  contrary  is  generally  a  very  good 
subject.  Children  between  the  ages  of  seven  and  twelve  are  excellent,  the 
proportion  here  running  as  high  as  four  in  five,  as  opposed  to  the  one  in  five 
average  of  normal  adults. 

This  leaves  us  with  no  means  at  all  of  judging  the  susceptibility  of  the  average 
adult.  But  we  can  still  do  considerable  to  save  ourselves  time  and  trouble.  We 
can  use  some  of  the  simplest  tests  of  hypnosis  as  indicators.  For  example,  the 
"sway"  technique  helps  us.  Here  we  really  borrow  from  the  stage  hypnotist. 

The  subject  is  asked  to  stand  erect  and  we  attach  to  the  top  of  his  head  a  system 
of  strings  and  wires  which  measure  accurately  the  sway  of  his  body.  Then  we 
ask  him  to  close  his  eyes,  suggest  to  him  that  he  is  falling  backward  and  get  an 
accurate  measurement  of  just  how  far  he  does  sway.  The  speed  and  extent  to 
which  he  accepts  these  suggestions  give  us  a  fairly  accurate  picture  as  to  his 
possibilities  as  a  subject. 

Another  rapid  way  of  picking  the  good  subject,  in  the  absence  of  any 
equipment,  is  simply  to  use  the  test  of  clasping  the  hands,  as  mentioned 
previously.  We  begin  by  requesting  the  subject  to  clasp  his  hands  firmly 
together,  and  to  imagine  as  vividly  as  possible  that  they  are  locked  together, 
that  he  cannot  take  them  apart.  We  reinforce  this  by  our  own  suggestions  that 
the  hands  are  locked  tightly  together  and  once  again  the  difficulty  he  has  in 
parting  his  hands  gives  us  a  fairly  good  cue  as  to  what  will  happen  with  more 
advanced  tests. 

However,  the  writer  finds  that  the  best  way  to  discover  good  subjects  is  by 
using  group  hypnotism.  He  takes  a  group  of  about  a  dozen  individuals  who 
wish  to  co-operate,  seats  them  in  chairs,  tells  them  to  close  their  eyes  and 
proceeds  to  talk  sleep.  Then  after  a  couple  of  minutes  he  dares  them  to  open 
their  eyes,  and  notes  results.  The  entire  group  is  told  to  awaken-just  a 


precaution  as  almost  never  will  anyone  go  into  trance  at  such  short  notice-and 
next  the  operator  asks  them  to  clasp  hands,  following  this  by  the  usual 
challenge.  Then  he  stiffens  out  the  arms  of  the  entire  group  and  dares  them  to 
relax  the  arm  muscles.  Finally,  he  starts  their  hands  rotating  and  defies  them  to 
stop  the  movement.  After  each  test,  of  course,  he  assures  himself  that  everyone 
is  wide  awake. 

The  experienced  operator  can  easily  pick  the  good  subjects  with  such  a 
technique,  and  have  the  whole  thing  over  in  ten  minutes.  He  observes  these 
individuals  who  are  continually  in  difficulty  when  he  challenges  the  group  or 
who  are  too  relaxed  to  even  make  an  effort.  These  he  notes  as  future  good 
subjects  and  dismisses  the  group  when  he  wishes.  The  only  real  difficulty  here 
is  one  of  discipline.  The  whole  procedure  is  pretty  certain  to  strike  some 
member  of  the  group  as  being  very  funny,  but  a  little  experience  will  soon 
enable  the  operator  to  handle  these  situations  without  offense  to  anyone.  A  lazy 
man's  way  of  handling  this  matter  of  group  hypnosis  when  searching  for 
subjects  is  to  use  the  victrola  record.  The  operator  may  either  make  one  for 
himself  or  use  one  of  those  supplied  by  the  houses  which  handle  psychological 
apparatus. 

It  is  very  easy  to  get  co-operation  from  a  group  with  one  of  these  records.  It  is 
impersonal  and  looks  much  more  like  a  genuine  psychological  experiment,  at 
least  to  the  layman.  Once  again,  with  practice,  it  is  a  simple  matter  for  the 
experienced  hypnotist  to  watch  the  group  and  pick  out  the  good  subjects  on  the 
basis  of  how  they  behave  to  the  victrola  record. 

Some  people  are  so  extremely  susceptible  to  hypnotism  that  at  times  we  get 
curious  results  even  when  using  a  victrola  record.  The  writer  recalls  one  such 
incident.  He  had  a  group  who  wished  to  listen  to  his  record.  They  knew  very 
little  about  hypnotism  but  had  heard  that  this  marvelous  gadget,  just  on  the 
market,  would  actually  hypnotize. 

They  were  all  seated  comfortably,  the  writer  reached  for  the  record-and  it 
wasn't  there.  A  colleague  was  using  it  in  another  building.  So  he  took  the  first 
record  in  sight,  put  it  on  the  victrola  and  said,  humorously,  "Now  listen  to  that." 

Returning  five  minutes  later  he  was  astonished  to  see  that  one  of  the  group  was 
evidently  going  into  deep  hypnosis.  So  he  turned  the  record  over  and  remarked, 
"That  will  do  the  trick  very  nicely."  And  it  did.  The  subject  was  deeply 
hypnotized  and  had  to  be  awakened  by  the  usual  method.  The  record  in 
question  was  a  Swiss  yodelling  song!  The  man  expected  to  be  hypnotized,  was 
an  excellent  subject,  and  his  own  imagination  did  the  rest. 


The  tests  which  we  have  suggested  as  of  aid  in  detecting  those  individuals  who 
will  go  into  deep  hypnotism,  are,  however,  only  bits  of  the  hypnotic  technique 
itself.  As  we  mentioned  before,  there  is  no  way  of  telling  the  good  subject, 
except  by  actually  using  hypnotism  in  some  form  or  other.  Contrary  to  general 
opinion,  susceptibility  has  nothing  to  do  with  a  "weak  will."  Neither  has  it  any 
relation  to  intelligence.  In  actual  practice  it  is  much  better  to  deal  with  highly 
intelligent  individuals.  They  will  get  the  knack  of  the  thing  and  co-operate 
more  quickly  than  others. 

Nor  has  hypnotism  anything  to  do  with  the  sex  of  the  subject.  Many  people 
have  the  idea  that  women,  especially  young  women,  are  much  more  easily  put 
into  the  trance  than  are  men.  Scientific  research  gives  no  basis  whatsoever  for 
such  an  idea.  There  appears  to  be  no  difference. 

We  will  mention  here  another  point  to  which  we  will  later  return.  Group 
hypnotism  in  the  popular  sense  of  the  word  is  quite  impossible.  No  hypnotist, 
no  matter  how  good,  could  meet  a  group  of,  say,  thirty  people  and  hypnotize 
the  lot,  unless  of  course  by  some  weird  chance  all  thirty  happened  to  be  good 
subjects.  The  odds  against  such  a  chance  are  very  heavy.  In  other  words,  the 
Hindu  rope  trick  is  not  done  by  group  hypnotism.  As  a  matter  of  fact  it  never 
occurred  at  all  in  spite  of  a  great  deal  of  popular  legend  on  the  subject.  If  the 
reader  doubts  this  statement,  and  he  will,  he  may  look  up  any  good  book  on 
magic  or  any  stage  magician.  We  give  some  very  good  imitations  in  our 
modern  theaters  when  the  necessary  apparatus  is  at  hand,  but  this  could  never 
be  duplicated  in  the  open  under  the  blazing  Indian  sun  with  the  crowd 
surrounding  the  juggler  on  all  sides. 

The  techniques  we  have  described  can  be  mastered  by  anyone,  just  as  anyone 
can  learn  to  run  an  automobile.  To  be  sure,  some  people  turn  out  to  be  much 
more  expert  drivers  than  others,  but  there  is  certainly  no  mystery  connected 
with  driving  the  auto.  This  does  not  mean  that  everyone  should  learn  to  use 
hypnotism  or  should,  of  necessity,  be  permitted  to  use  it  if  he  did  learn.  That  is 
quite  another  thing.  We  simply  say  it  is  possible  for  anyone  to  learn  and  stress 
this  point  because  of  popular  notions  of  will  power,  the  dark  hypnotic  eye, 
black  magic,  and  other  weird  ideas. 

Finally,  many  readers  may  question  the  wisdom  of  being  so  very  frank  on  this 
matter  of  inducing  hypnotism.  We  reply  that  the  danger  is  quite  imaginary.  The 
average  layman  cannot  use  hypnotism  because  he  has  neither  the  time  nor  the 
interest.  A  mastery  of  technique  demands  hard  work,  and  the  process  of 
hypnotizing  is  notoriously  boring  and  tedious.  One  must  have  more  than  a  mere 


passing  interest  in  the  subject  if  he  is  to  settle  down  and  really  master 
hypnotism. 

In  a  later  chapter  we  discuss  the  dangers  of  hypnotism,  especially  in  connection 
with  crime.  Here,  again,  the  point  is  largely  imaginary,  and  the  reader  is  asked 
to  reserve  judgment  until  we  discuss  such  questions.  The  writer  will  contend 
that  hypnotism  can  be  used  for  criminal  ends,  but  such  use  would  demand  an 
operator  of  the  highest  skill.  For  any  amateur  such  attempts  would  only  lead  to 
prison.  Moreover,  our  police  are  quite  familiar  with  everything  written  in  this 
book  and  could  detect  a  crime  involving  hypnotism  quite  as  readily  as  any 
other.  This  may  come  as  a  revelation  to  the  reader  but,  for  example,  our  own 
Federal  Bureau  of  Investigation  knows  more  about  possible  criminal  uses  of 
hypnotism  than  anyone  in  the  country.  So  we  may  safely  leave  this  aspect  of 
our  problem  in  the  hands  of  the  proper  authorities,  who  are  quite  capable  of 
handling  it.  The  scientist  is  interested  only  in  facts.  How  these  facts  will  be 
used  is  a  question  which  he  is  not  called  on  to  answer. 

Chapter  2 

MORE  COMMON  PHENOMENA 

WE  DEVOTED  our  first  chapter  to  the  induction  of  hypnosis,  pointing  out  that 
only  about  one  in  five  of  the  general  population  will  go  into  the  deepest  stage 
o(  hypnotism;  namely,  somnambulism.  We  wish  to  deal  here  with  the  more 
common  phenomena  which  we  find  in  hypnotism  once  the  trance  has  been 
induced.  The  reader  must  bear  in  mind  that,  while  the  more  striking  things 
which  happen  are  found  only  in  the  deepest  stage,  nevertheless  there  are  many 
conditions  in  lighter  states  which  are  well  worth  our  attention.  We  generally 
accept  amnesia  or  lack  4  memory  as  the  chief  characteristic  of  somnambulism. 
The  subject  has  no  memory  at  all  when  he  awakens  as  to  what  has  occurred  in 
the  trance.  Yet  a  great  many  things  may  occur  with  the  subject  wide  awake. 

For  example,  the  writer  had  occasion  to  use  hypnotism  with  a  friend,  a  good 
pianist.  He  did  not  lose  consciousness  but  it  was  quite  possible  to  paralyze  large 
groups  of  muscles,  so  much  so  that  he  was  unable  to  arise  from  his  chair.  The 
operator  asked  him  to  open  his  eyes,  moved  the  chair  close  to  the  piano  and 
made  a  bet  with  him  that  he  could  not  leave  it  for  the  next  half  hour.  He  played 
as  well  as  ever,  but  every  time  he  tried  to  stand  up  the  operator  simply  said, 
"Sorry,  it  can't  be  done."  That  simple  suggestion  was  quite  enough  to  keep  him 
glued  in  his  chair. 

This  interference  with  use  of  the  muscles  is  very  easy,  even  in  the  light  stages. 
Professor  W.  R.  Wells  of  Syracuse  University  has  made  very  extensive 


experiments  with  "waking  hypnotism."  This  is  a  very  interesting  point  since 
many  of  the  older  investigators  thought  hypnotism  merely  a  special  variety  of 
sleep,  a  theory  which  is  now  generally  rejected. 

The  writer  recalls  one  of  his  very  earliest  contacts  with  hypnotism.  A  stage 
operator  was  demonstrating  in  the  local  theater.  One  of  the  audience,  a 
dignified  member  of  the  community  and  a  deacon  in  his  church,  turned  out  to 
be  a  very  good  subject.  The  hypnotist  had  him  stand  on  his  head,  bark  around 
the  stage  on  all  fours,  take  off  a  goodly  portion  of  his  clothes  and  give,  in 
general,  a  very  humiliating  exhibition.  He  then  awakened  his  subject  who  just 
as  promptly  knocked  him  down.  The  subject  had  been  quite  conscious 
throughout  the  whole  performance  but  had  been  unable  to  resist  the  suggestions 
of  the  hypnotist.  He  remembered  everything  that  had  occurred  and  was  very 
naturally  indignant. 

Wells  produces  his  results  in  "waking"  hypnotism  with  much  the  same  attack  as 
does  the  professional.  A  high  pressure  volley  of  suggestions  is  used  without 
giving  the  subject  time  to  recover  his  balance.  With  this  particular  technique  he 
does  not  mention  "sleep"  and  finds  that  the  subject  very  often  remembers 
everything  when  he  comes  out  of  the  trance. 

We  also  know  that  any  good  subject  can  recall  consciously  everything  that  has 
happened  when  hypnotized,  if  we  assure  him  in  the  hypnotic  trance  that  he  will 
do  so.  As  a  matter  of  fact  it  is  often  quite  enough  for  the  hypnotist  to  say,  in  the 
waking  state,  "You  will  remember  everything  that  occurred  in  the  last  trance. 
Think.  It  is  all  coming  back  quite  clearly."  The  entire  series  of  incidents  will 
then  return  to  consciousness. 

But  while  unconsciousness  may  not  be  necessary  to  produce  all  the  phenomena 
of  hypnotism,  the  fact  remains  that  the  somnambulist  generally  remembers 
nothing  unless  we  take  some  special  steps  to  get  recall.  So  we  will  describe  the 
trance  state  from  now  on,  using  the  typical  somnambulist  as  an  example.  The 
key  to  hypnotism  is  suggestion.  The  subject,  left  to  himself,  does  nothing.  The 
hypnotic  state  may  then  change  to  normal  sleep  and  he  will  awaken  in  ordinary 
fashion,  or  he  may  just  remain  quiet,  always  open  to  suggestions  from  the 
operator  but  quite  incapable  of  acting  on  his  own  accord. 

This  suggestion,  by  the  way,  need  not  be  verbal,  although  that  is  the  usual  type. 
Any  form  of  suggestion  is  quite  satisfactory  provided  the  subject  understands 
what  is  desired.  For  example,  if  when  the  hypnotic  trance  is  under  way  we  take 
the  subject's  arm  or  hand  and  mold  it  into  any  gesture,  then  hold  it  there  for  a 
second  or  two  the  subject  will  conclude  that  we  wish  this  sort  of  thing.  No  word 


need  be  spoken.  With  a  little  practice  we  will  get  "waxy  plasticity"  wherein  the 
subject's  limbs  can  be  molded  like  wax  into  any  position,  no  matter  how 
uncomfortable,  and  will  remain  in  the  shape  we  have  given  them. 

Moreover,  the  subject  is  very  quick  to  co-operate  with  the  operator  and  at  times 
almost  uncanny  in  his  ability  to  figure  out  what  the  operator  wishes.  He  seems 
to  read  his  mind  and  this  trait  undoubtedly  led  many  of  the  older  hypnotists  into 
wild  conclusions  as  to  the  ability  of  the  hypnotic  subject  as  a  "mind  reader." 

Rapport 

It  is  a  very  curious  thing  that  the  subject  will  only  listen  to  the  operator;  he  will 
receive  suggestions  from  him  alone.  Others  present  may  talk  to  him,  shout 
orders  and  give  suggestions,  but  he  ignores  them  as  completely  as  if  they  were 
on  the  planet  Mars.  This  curious  condition  we  refer  to  as  "rapport."  The  subject, 
we  say,  is  in  rapport  only  with  the  hypnotist. 

Here,  we  see  one  of  those  strange  contradictions  which  are  so  characteristic  of 
the  hypnotized  person  for  actually,  he  hears  everything  which  is  taking  place, 
but  for  some  curious  reason  he  chooses  to  do  a  little  acting.  He  behaves  as  if 
there  were  no  others  present  in  the  room. 

For  example,  we  take  a  good  subject  and  proceed  to  show  how  mind  reading 
occurs.  The  operator  conceals  his  handkerchief,  tells  the  subject  to  concentrate 
and  get  the  object  in  question.  Others  are  present.  They  make  suggestions  and 
give  him  orders  but  he  ignores  them  completely  and  is  at  a  total  loss  to  find  the 
handkerchief. 

Then,  one  of  those  present  whispers  to  another,  but  quite  loud  enough  for  the 
subject  to  hear,  "The  handkerchief  is  in  the  brief  case  in  the  study."  Apparently 
the  subject  has  heard  nothing  but  a  minute  later  he  goes  to  the  study,  opens  the 
brief  case  and  returns  with  the  handkerchief.  It  can  be  shown  by  such 
experiments  that  rapport  is  not  real.  The  subject  always  has  his  ears  open  to 
pick  up  any  cue,  yet  in  almost  every  case  the  new  subject  will  immediately  start 
on  this  little  piece  of  fraud. 

This  illustrates  a  point  we  will  mention  frequently.  The  subject  when 
hypnotized  may  be  quite  a  different  person  from  the  same  individual  if  awake. 
He  is  so  anxious  to  co-operate,  to  show  his  abilities,  that  he  may  try  almost  any 
trick  in  order  to  do  what  the  operator  demands.  This  requires  that  in  many  tests 
we  keep  the  subject  under  the  very  closest  observation. 


For  example,  the  older  hypnotists  claimed  many  remarkable  things  about 
hypnotism.  One  of  these  was  the  ability  of  the  subject  to  raise  blisters  under 
suggestion.  The  standard  practice  was  to  put  a  bandage  on  the  subject's  wrist 
and  suggest  to  him  very  strongly  that  the  bandage  was  a  mustard  plaster  which 
would  shortly  produce  a  blister  and  strange  to  say,  in  many  cases  the  suggestion 
was  successful.  An  actual  blister  might  not  always  appear  but  the  skin  under  the 
bandage  would  become  very  inflamed  and  red,  blood  appearing  in  many  cases. 
Then  some  experimenters  became  suspicious.  They  left  the  subject  in  the  room 
by  himself  but  kept  him  under  close  scrutiny  through  a  peep-hole.  It  was  then 
found  that  the  subject,  in  his  great  desire  to  co-operate,  was  playing  tricks  on 
the  hypnotist.  He  would  deliberately  rub  the  bandage  with  all  his  strength  so  as 
to  irritate  the  skin  beneath.  Worse  still,  some  subjects  were  seen  to  take  a 
needle,  thrust  it  in  under  the  bandage,  and  break  the  skin  in  this  manner.'  Yet, 
when  awake,  these  same  subjects  were  models  of  honesty  and  even  when 
questioned  in  hypnotism  they  would  deny  all  knowledge  of  trickery.  So  we 
have  to  watch  the  subject  very  closely  in  many  experiments.  The  mere  fact  that 
he  claims  to  be  in  rapport  only  with  the  operator  means  nothing.  It  is  just  a  little 
pose  which,  for  some  reason  or  other,  he  feels  bound  to  maintain. 

Another  curious  thing  is  that  we  can  shift  the  rapport  very  easily.  The  operator 
merely  says  to  the  subject,  "Listen  carefully.  Mr.  Smith  is  here  in  the  room  with 
us.  I  am  going  to  shift  the  control  to  Mr.  Smith.  He  is  standing  in  front  of  you.  I 
will  repeat  the  first  five  letters  of  the  alphabet,  a  to  e.  When  I  get  to  e,  Mr. 

Smith  will  be  in  charge.  You  will  listen  only  to  him  and  accept  only  his 
suggestions."  Under  these  conditions  Smith  now  becomes  the  operator  and  the 
subject  will  treat  him  as  such  until  he  chooses  to  hand  back  control  to  the 
original  hypnotist. 

So  easy  is  this  trick  that  we  can  even  shift  control  from  a  victrola  record  to  any 
operator  who  happens  to  be  present.  We  simply  work  the  suggestion  into  the 
victrola  record,  using  exactly  the  same  formula  as  given  above.  The  operator 
then  takes  over  control  from  the  record,  treats  the  subject  as  he  would  any 
somnambulist  and  awakens  him  whenever  he  chooses. 

The  mesmerist  or  magnetist  of  one  hundred  fifty  years  ago  did  even  better.  He 
would  magnetize  a  tree.  In  future,  the  subject  had  only  to  touch  the  tree  and  he 
would  go  into  the  mesmeric  trance,  receiving  all  the  beneficial  effects  of  the 
magnetic  fluid  from  the  tree  in  question.  Many  of  these  old  practices  seem 
pretty  weird  but  we  must  remember  that  science  was  then  in  its  infancy. 

Perhaps  the  best  known  of  all  hypnotic  phenomena  are  the  so-called 
hallucinations.  The  reader  will  be  familiar  with  these  if  he  has  ever  seen  a  stage 
demonstration  of  hypnotism.  He  will  recall  that  the  subject,  following  a 


suggestion  by  the  hypnotist,  will  see  an  elephant  or  a  tiger  on  the  stage  and  will 
hunt  it  with  a  broom  for  a  gun.  The  operator  will  put  a  goldfish  bowl  in  front  of 
him,  tell  him  it  is  the  Atlantic  Ocean,  equip  him  with  a  fishing  line,  and  tell  him 
to  fish  for  whales.  Actually  this  would  be  more  in  the  nature  of  an  illusion  but 
they  are  so  close  to  hallucinations  that  we  will  treat  all  under  the  same  head. 
These  hallucinations  of  sight  or  visions  are  very  easy  to  get  in  any  good  subject 
and  like  everything  else  in  hypnotism  they  depend  on  suggestion.  The  hypnotist 
simply  tells  the  subject  to  open  his  eyes.  Then  he  says,  "Look.  The  door  is 
opening  and  a  black  dog  is  coming  into  the  room.  His  name  is  Rover.  Go  over 
and  pet  him."  This  he  does.  The  hypnotist  adds,  "He's  probably  hungry.  Better 
give  him  something  to  eat."  The  subject  glances  around,  takes  a  plate  from  the 
table,  puts  a  stick  on  it  for  a  bone  and  proceeds  to  feed  the  dog.  All  this  is  done 
in  a  perfectly  normal  fashion  which  leaves  very  little  doubt  in  the  spectator's 
mind  that  the  subject  thinks  he  is  dealing  with  a  real  dog. 

The  hypnotized  person  will  treat  every  hallucination  with  great  reality.  Tell  him 
the  dog  is  friendly  and  he  will  pet  it,  but  say  the  dog  has  bitten  him  and  he  may 
retreat  in  fear.  Or  he  may  seize  the  dog  by  the  neck  and  throw  it  out  the  door; 
the  type  of  reaction  depends  on  how  the  subject  would  normally  behave. 
Suggest  to  the  subject  that  he  is  watching  a  football  game  and  he  will  cheer  on 
his  favorite  team  in  very  convincing  fashion.  Tell  him  he  is  in  a  cathedral  and 
he  may  kneel,  that  the  police  are  coming  in  the  front  door  to  arrest  him  and  he 
will  try  to  leave  by  the  back. 

What  we  obtain  depends  largely  on  the  type  of  individual.  The  writer  has  a 
favorite  trick  of  telling  the  subject  there  is  a  "galywampus"  in  the  room.  Of 
course,  neither  the  subject  nor  the  operator  has  ever  seen  such  an  animal,  so  it 
is  very  interesting  to  note  what  will  happen.  Some  subjects  will  simply  look 
puzzled  and  refuse  to  answer.  Others,  realizing  the  joke,  will  grin  and  say, 
"There  ain't  no  such  animal"  or  pass  it  off  with  some  such  remark.  But  others 
will  rise  to  the  occasion  in  noble  fashion.  Recently  one  subject  described  it  as 
"a  pink  elephant  with  wings,  a  trunk  on  both  ends  and  bowlegged."  Asked  what 
noise  it  made,  he  replied,  "That  depends.  When  you  mention  Roosevelt's  name 
he  laughs  like  a  human  but  if  it's  Willkie  he  just  looks  sad  and  sighs."  Needless 
to  say  the  subject  was  a  good  Democrat,  had  a  vivid  imagination,  and  was  using 
it. 

The  reaction  to  these  hallucinations  brings  out  a  very  important  point  which  the 
reader  must  always  bear  in  mind.  The  hypnotized  person  is  still  an  individual, 
not  a  tool,  and  behaves  according  to  his  own  background.  Place  a  glass  of  water 
in  front  of  the  ardent  prohibitionist,  tell  him  it  is  whisky  and  he  must  drink  it. 
Generally  he  will  refuse.  Insist  and  he  may  become  very  angry,  even  awaken 


from  the  trance.  Place  that  same  glass  before  another  subject  who  has  no  such 
scruples  and  he  will  drink  the  liquor  with  great  relish. 


Tell  a  communist  he  is  talking  to  a  political  meeting  and  that  he  is  to  defend 
capitalism.  He  will  probably  do  just  the  opposite,  criticizing  his  audience  and 
their  views  in  no  uncertain  fashion.  The  subject  is  always  willing  to  play  a  part, 
provided  it  does  not  go  against  any  deep-seated  convictions.  But  when  we 
suggest  an  act  which  is  in  conflict  with  any  of  these,  he  may  become  very 
obstinate.  We  will  discuss  this  in  a  later  chapter  devoted  to  hypnotism  and 
crime. 

It  is  quite  easy  to  hallucinate  any  of  the  senses,  but  not  always  quite  as 
spectacular  as  in  the  case  of  vision.  Hearing,  for  example,  lends  itself  very 
easily  to  this  attack.  We  can  have  the  subject  listen  in  rapt  attention  to  a 
supposed  symphony  concert,  describing  every  number  and  criticizing  the  way 
in  which  each  is  played.  It  is  possible  to  have  him  listen  to  a  political  talk  and 
then  describe  it  afterward,  for  example  one  by  Mr.  Roosevelt.  The  experience 
will  be  very  real  and  he  will  stoutly  defend  his  views  at  a  later  period;  this  in 
spite  of  the  fact  that  the  President  was  on  the  air  at  exactly  the  time  when  he 
was  supposed  to  be  listening  and  gave  quite  a  different  address.  After  all,  the 
subject  contends  he  heard  it  and  certainly  believes  his  own  ears!  In  some  of  the 
senses  we  can  obtain  a  curious  mixture  of  hallucination,  illusion,  and 
anaesthesia.  For  example,  take  the  following  cases.  It  is  quite  possible  to  give 
the  subject  a  glass  of  kerosene,  tell  him  it  is  very  fine  wine,  and  have  him  drink 
it.  He  does  so  with  great  satisfaction.  Or  we  can  reverse  the  process.  We  can 
give  him  a  glass  of  whisky,  tell  him  it  tastes  vile  and  that  he  will  be  very  sick  to 
his  stomach  once  he  drinks  it.  That  probably  will  also  work. 

Such  a  technique  was  once  in  great  favor  for  treating  alcoholics.  If  the  subject 
proved  to  be  a  somnambulist,  he  was  assured  in  hypnotism  that  every  time  he 
took  a  drink  in  future  he  would  be  violently  sick.  If  it  worked,  and  it  generally 
would,  the  cure  became  an  endurance  contest  with  everything  in  favor  of  the 
hypnotist.  After  all,  drinking  is  not  much  of  a  pleasure  if  every  drink  is  only  the 
prelude  to  a  vomiting  fit.  G.  B.  Cutten  in  his  Psychology  o  f  Alcoholism  deals 
in  detail  with  this  matter  of  treating  the  drunkard. 

Similarly  it  was  once  common  practice  to  handle  smoking  by  the  same  method. 
The  subject  was  assured  that  tobacco  smoke  would  in  future  taste  very  bad  and 
a  cigarette  would  be  followed  by  an  upset  stomach.  This  was  really 
hallucinating  the  senses  of  smell  and  taste.  A  friend  of  the  writer  in  a  near-by 
city  tried  this  on  a  young  man  at  the  request  of  his  parents  but  unfortunately  he 
did  not  ask  the  consent  of  the  subject  beforehand.  Once  his  victim  heard  of  the 


plan  he  was  very  indignant  over  the  whole  thing,  swore  he  would  smoke  in 
spite  of  any  hypnotist  and  went  at  it  again.  In  six  months  time  he  was  smoking 
with  reasonable  comfort,  but  he  almost  ruined  his  digestion  in  the  process. 
Smell  lends  itself  very  nicely  to  hallucinations,  one  of  our  best  tests  of 
hypnotism  coming  in  this  field.  If  we  have  any  doubt  as  to  whether  the  subject 
is  deeply  hypnotized,  we  tell  him  he  is  about  to  smell  some  very  fine  perfume. 
We  then  hold  a  bottle  of  strong  ammonia  under  his  nose  and  tell  him  to  sniff;  if 
he  is  in  deep  hypnotism  he  seems  to  enjoy  the  perfume,  but  if  not,  or  if  he 
should  be  bluffing  he  will  come  out  of  the  trance  in  very  short  order.  We  also 
have  some  very  curious  cases  wherein  we  can  deceive  the  skin  senses.  For 
example,  we  can  take  a  pencil,  hold  it  near  the  subject's  hand,  and  tell  him  it  is 
a  red  hot  poker.  If  we  touch  the  hand,  he  will  draw  it  away,  sometimes 
shrieking  with  pain.  Actually,  we  have  never  been  able  to  prove  that  the  skin  is 
really  "burned"  by  this  technique,  although  some  of  the  older  authorities  did 
report  just  this.  Proof  in  science,  as  we  will  later  see,  is  no  simple  matter. 

Since  we  are  on  the  skin,  let  us  report  a  very  interesting  experiment  by 
Liebeault,  the  real  father  of  modern  hypnotism.  He  had  one  exceptionally  good 
subject  on  whom  he  reported  the  following.  He  was  able  to  trace  letters  on  this 
man's  forearm  with  the  blunt  end  of  a  pencil.  Later  these  letters  would  appear 
as  letters  in  blood!  Not  only  that,  but  with  this  one  subject  he  carried  the 
experiment  even  farther.  The  subject  was  able  to  do  it  himself,  suggesting  to 
himself-autosuggestionthat  the  blood  letters  would  appear!  Liebeault  stresses 
the  fact  that  such  remarkable  phenomena  could  only  be  obtained  with  the  very 
best  of  subjects. 

Liebeault  did  his  work  around  the  1870's  and  no  other  operator  since  has  been 
able  to  get  these  results.  This  tends  to  cast  a  doubt  on  the  experiment  since 
Liebeault  may  not  have  been  careful  enough  with  his  subject.  It  is  quite 
possible  that,  if  left  alone,  he  could  have  scratched  his  arm  with  a  needle  along 
the  lines  of  the  letters  and  yet,  strange  as  it  may  sound,  there  is  no  reason  why 
these  results  could  not  have  been  obtained.  They  would  depend  on  the  action  of 
the  autonomic  nervous  system  and  we  do  know  quite  definitely  that  we  can 
influence  this  by  means  of  hypnotism. 

We  really  have  two  nervous  systems  in  our  bodies.  All  our  voluntary  muscles 
are  controlled  by  the  central  nervous  system,  composed  of  the  brain  and  spinal 
cord,  but  our  internal  organs  also  do  their  work  by  muscular  action,  in  many 
cases.  The  lungs,  heart,  stomach,  even  the  arteries  and  veins  could  never 
function  if  it  were  not  for  the  activity  of  muscles  and  these  "involuntary" 
muscles  are  under  control  of  the  autonomic  nervous  system.  This  system  lies 


outside  the  spine  and,  although  joined  to  it,  acts  in  general  quite  independently 
of  the  other  system. 

For  example,  try  and  influence  your  heart  beat  as  you  read  this  book.  It  is 
almost  impossible.  Yet  strange  to  say,  we  can  influence  the  heart  through 
hypnotism.  We  can  make  it  beat  faster  by  mere  suggestion,  especially  if  we  tell 
the  subject  he  has,  say,  just  escaped  from  a  bear  and  is  very  much  excited. 
Excitement,  as  we  all  know,  tends  to  make  the  heart  beat  faster  and  the  scene 
we  suggest  to  the  subject  is  so  real  to  him  that  he  behaves  as  if  it  were  a  real 
bear.  Yet  very  few  of  the  readers  could  imagine  such  a  scene  vividly  enough  to 
get  any  real  reaction.  The  writer  once  saw  a  stage  hypnotist  suggest  to  a  subject 
that  he  was  falling  over  a  cliff.  He  was  actually  falling  from  a  table  onto  a  pile 
of  cushions.  The  subject  gave  a  wild  shriek  of  fear  as  he  fell  and  collapsed. 

That  was  genuine.  A  doctor  and  heart  stimulants  were  necessary  to  save  his 
life. 

Nor  could  any  of  my  readers  by  imagining  that  they  were  eating  some  very 
disgusting  dish,  make  themselves  vomit.  Here  again  the  hypnotist  can  influence 
the  autonomic  nervous  system,  as  seen  in  the  action  of  the  stomach.  As  we 
mentioned  before,  we  have  only  to  suggest  to  the  somnambulist  that  liquor 
tastes  bad,  that  it  is  disgusting  and  in  future  he  may  find  that  even  the  smell  of 
liquor  will  turn  him  sick  to  his  stomach.  Not  only  that,  but  we  can  influence  the 
subject's  stomach  in  much  more  subtle  fashion.  We  can,  for  example,  suggest  to 
him  that  he  is  eating  a  beef  steak.  Not  only  will  his  mouth  water  but  we  will 
find  that  his  stomach  secretes  the  proper  juices  to  handle  the  meal  in  question. 
For  a  very  sane  and  critical  discussion  of  all  these  rather  unusual  phenomena 
we  refer  the  reader  to  the  work  by  Clark  L.  Hull  of  Yale  University,  Hypnosis 
and  Suggestibility. 

A  Russian  psychologist  recently  reported  an  even  more  interesting  stomach 
experiment.  He  claims  that  in  hypnosis  he  was  able  to  give  his  subjects  large 
quantities  of  alcohol,  with  the  suggestion  that  they  would  not  get  drunk.  And 
they  did  not  either  in  hypnosis  or  after  the  trance!  We  may  add  that  before  such 
claims  could  be  accepted  they  would  have  to  be  checked  on  by  many  other 
operators. 

At  this  point  a  very  natural  question  will  occur  to  the  reader.  Why  all  this  doubt 
and  uncertainty?  If  we  are  in  doubt,  then  why  not  clear  the  matter  up  at  once 
and  in  short  order.  Unfortunately  hypnotism  of  all  subjects  does  not  lend  itself 
to  this  offhand  treatment.  For  example,  let  us  take  the  question  of  muscular 
strength  in  hypnosis.  N.  C.  Nicholson  investigated  this  using  the  ergograph,  an 
instrument  designed  to  measure  the  amount  of  work  a  subject  can  perform  with 


one  of  his  fingers.  It  is  easy  to  measure  the  work  of  a  finger  and  what  applies  to 
the  finger  should,  in  theory,  apply  to  any  other  group  of  muscles.  Nicholson 
conducted  a  series  of  experiments  and  concluded  that  "during  the  hypnotic 
sleep  the  capacity  for  work  seemed  practically  endless." 

But  later  P.  C.  Young  repeated  Nicholson's  experiments  and  found,  at  least  to 
his  satisfaction,  that  muscular  strength  in  hypnotism  was  no  greater  than  in  the 
normal  waking  state.  The  results  would  have  been  far  less  disturbing  had  either 
of  these  men  been  poorly  trained  and  incompetent.  Unfortunately,  Nicholson 
did  his  work  at  Johns  Hopkins  and  Young  did  his  at  Harvard.  Both  were  very 
careful  experimenters.  The  sharp  contradiction  is  hard  to  explain  but,  in  the 
writer's  opinion,  was  undoubtedly  due  to  the  attitude  of  the  hypnotists.  The 
good  subject  co-operates  in  wonderful  fashion.  Nicholson's  subjects  realized 
they  were  supposed  to  show  an  increase  in  muscular  strength  and  did  so.  The 
opposite  applied  to  Young's  experiments. 

A  great  deal  of  our  work  in  hypnotism  must  always  be  carried  out  with  this  fact 
in  mind  for  the  subject  tends  to  give  what  is  expected.  Returning  to  this  matter 
of  physical  strength,  we  are  all  familiar,  at  least  have  read  about,  the  uncanny 
ability  of  most  subjects  to  rest  with  the  head  on  one  chair  and  feet  on  another. 
Then  to  have  someone  sit  on  their  chest  while  they  recite  poetry.  This  muscular 
rigidity  can  be  obtained  in  most  good  subjects,  provided  the  hypnotist  makes  it 
quite  clear  that  he  expects  it. 

But  if  the  subject  suspects  that  the  hypnotist  does  not  want  this  result,  he  will 
not  stiffen  up  his  muscles.  For  example,  we  take  a  very  good  subject  and  tell 
him  that  we  are  now  going  to  give  him  a  very  severe  physical  test,  we  are  going 
to  put  his  feet  on  one  chair,  his  head  on  another,  and  sit  on  his  chest.  Then  we 
say  to  someone  present,  "Of  course,  it's  impossible.  All  this  talk  about  seeing  it 
done  on  the  stage  is  nonsense.  They  use  fake  subjects  and  magician's  tricks 
with  which  to  do  it." 

Now  we  try  to  stiffen  out  our  subject,  but  he  knows  we  do  not  expect  results. 

So  we  get  none.  He  makes  no  effort  and  sags  down  in  discouraging  fashion 
whenever  we  try  to  stretch  him  between  the  two  chairs.  Yet  we  must  bear  in 
mind  that  there  is  no  reason  why  we  could  not  get  this  exceptional  increase  in 
strength.  Few  readers  realize  the  tremendous  strength  of  the  human  muscles, 
when  we  can  really  make  them  exert  themselves.  We  use  a  drug  named 
metrazol  to  treat  a  form  of  insanity,  dementia  praecox.  This  throws  the  patient 
into  violent  convulsions,  so  violent,  in  fact  that  he  often  breaks  his  own  bones 
by  the  sheer  force  of  muscular  contraction.  This  is  no  wild  myth  but  a  grim  fact 
of  which  every  psychiatrist  is  very  conscious. 


A  recent  survey  has  shown  with  the  aid  of  X-ray  pictures  that  twenty-five  per 
cent  of  all  patients  undergoing  metrazol  treatment  actually  crack  some  bones  of 
the  spinal  column  in  these  savage  convulsions.  The  psychiatrist  now  uses 
another  drug,  curare,  to  offset  this.  Curare  paralyzes  the  muscles,  so  they  hope 
that  the  patient  can  now  get  the  mental  shock  without  the  body  strain.  At  the 
present  writing  we  have  not  enough  material  to  say  that  this  treatment  is  as 
good  as  straight  metrazol,  which  gives  excellent  results  in  many  cases.  But 
these  examples,  and  we  could  give  many  more,  will  show  the  reader  the 
tremendous  power  of  the  human  muscles  under  certain  conditions.  So  there  is 
no  reason  why  we  might  not  get  a  great  increase  in  strength  with  hypnosis. 

Then  there  is  another  possible  explanation.  Fatigue  is  a  defense  to  the  body. 
When  we  feel  tired  it  is  a  sign  that  we  have  worked  hard  enough  and  should 
stop  until  the  body  gets  the  waste  cleared  away  from  the  muscles.  There  seems 
to  be  a  fatigue  center  in  the  brain.  If  we  can  paralyze  this,  the  individual  will 
not  feel  tired,  no  matter  how  fatigued.  We  will  see  later  that  with  hypnotism  we 
can  get  anaesthesia  or  lack  of  feeling  in  many  parts  of  the  body.  It  may  be  that 
this  great  muscular  strength  in  many  cases  is  due  to  the  inability  to  feel  fatigue 
once  the  operator  assures  the  subject  that  he  can  do  great  feats  of  strength 
without  being  tired. 

This  is  one  reason  why  no  sane  hypnotist  would  dare  suggest  to  a  football 
player  before  a  game  that  he  was  to  play  the  game  of  his  life  and  would  be  able 
to  put  forth  his  very  best  without  feeling  in  any  way  tired.  Perhaps  he  would, 
but  in  so  doing  he  might  easily  exert  himself  so  much  that  he  would  die  of  a 
heart  attack. 

Returning  now  to  this  matter  of  producing  blisters  in  hypnotism.  Even  if  they 
were  produced,  it  would  illustrate  nothing  supernatural.  The  walls  of  the  blood 
vessels  are  under  control  of  the  autonomic  nervous  system.  We  can  definitely 
influence  this  system  in  hypnotism,  but  not  in  the  waking  state.  Granted  a 
person  with  a  very  sensitive  skin  there  is  no  reason  why  these  vessels  could  not 
break  and  let  out  blood  or  blood  plasma  under  the  bandage,  so  creating  a  blister 
or  actual  bleeding.  Normally  it  will  not  occur  so  we  tend  to  think  of  it  as 
impossible  just  as  we  tend  to  feel  that  the  subject  cannot  really  increase  his 
muscular  strength.  But,  in  the  opinion  of  the  writer,  there  is  strong  probability 
that  blisters  can  be  produced.  He  also  feels  certain  that  muscular  strength  can 
be  greatly  increased  by  means  of  suggestion. 

We  must  again  remind  the  reader  that  proof  in  science  is  often  difficult  to 
obtain,  and  in  hypnotism  this  is  notoriously  so.  There  can  be  no  doubt  as  to 
hallucinations  and  no  doubt  that  we  can  influence  the  activity  of  most  body 


organs.  But  we  must  suspend  judgment  on  bodily  strength  and  such  curios  as 
raising  blisters;  yet  there  are  many  other  things  claimed  of  hypnotism,  some 
accepted  and  some  in  doubt. 

Accepted,  for  example,  is  the  fact  that  we  can  produce  anaesthesia,  loss  of 
sensation  in  almost  every  sense  organ.  This  is  most  easily  seen  in  the  loss  of 
pain,  technically  known  as  analgesia.  As  a  matter  of  fact,  this  was  one  chief  use 
of  hypnotism  in  the  early  days.  An  English  doctor  in  India  by  the  name  of 
Esdaile  performed  the  first  such  operation  of  which  we  have  record  in  1845. 
During  the  course  of  his  long  practice  in  that  country  he  did  thousands  of 
operations,  about  three  hundred  of  these  being  of  a  major  character. 
Unfortunately  or  fortunately  as  the  case  may  be,  the  use  of  chloroform  was 
discovered  about  this  time  and  ether  shortly  afterward.  These  drugs  are  far 
more  certain  in  their  effects  and  much  easier  to  use  than  hypnotism,  which 
rapidly  vanished  from  use  as  an  anaesthetic. 

We  do  still  hear  of  cases  wherein  it  is  used,  in  which  the  condition  of  the 
patient  is  such  as  to  make  the  use  of  drugs  inadvisable.  There  has  also  been 
some  use  of  hypnotism  in  both  Germany  and  Austria  of  late  years,  especially  at 
childbirth.  But  the  interesting  fact  is  that  hypnotism  does  banish  pain.  In  fact, 
this  absence  of  pain  supplies  us  with  our  very  best  test  of  hypnotism  in  those 
situations  wherein  it  is  absolutely  necessary  to  be  sure  that  the  subject  is  not 
bluffing. 

The  writer  uses  a  little  device  known  as  a  variac.  This  plugs  into  an  ordinary 
light  socket  and  delivers  the  exact  voltage  required.  The  contacts  are  placed  on 
the  palm  and  back  of  the  left  hand,  blotting  paper  soaked  in  a  saturated  salt 
solution  being  used  to  insure  the  very  best  form  of  contact.  Under  these 
circumstances  the  reader  would  find  fifteen  volts  very  painful,  twenty 
unbearable.  But  a  subject  in  somnambulism  can  take  sixty,  even  one  hundred 
twenty  volts  without  flinching. 

Here  we  get  into  the  usual  argument  so  dear  to  the  hearts  of  all  psychologists.  Is 
it  anaesthesia  or  amnesia?  Perhaps  the  subject  actually  felt  the  pain,  but  merely 
forgot  about  it  on  awakening,  just  as  he  tends  to  forget  everything  else  which 
happens  in  somnambulism.  The  question  is  mostly  of  theoretical  interest,  but  it 
serves  to  illustrate  the  difficulty  of  answering  many  a  query  in  hypnotism. 
Considerable  work  has  been  done  on  this  problem  but  up  to  the  present  the 
question  remains  unanswered.  The  anaesthesia  may  or  may  not  be  real  but  the 
subject  acts  as  if  it  were,  insisting  after  the  trance  that  he  felt  no  pain.  Yet, 
whether  real  or  genuine,  it  does  not  have  nearly  as  much  importance  as  the 
average  reader  may  think.  Pain  is  the  doctor's  friend,  although  we  as  sufferers 


may  not  always  see  this  point.  It  is  nature's  great  alarm  signal.  Without  doubt 
hypnotism  could  completely  remove  the  pain  in  many  a  case  of  acute 
appendicitis,  but  that  would  not  prevent  the  appendix  from  rupturing.  It  might 
only  serve  to  lull  us  into  a  false  sense  of  security.  Similarly  pain  may  mean 
many  things.  Gastric  ulcer,  kidney  disease,  rheumatism  or  an  ulcerated  tooth. 
The  doctor's  problem  is  not  to  remove  the  pain  but  the  cause  of  the  pain. 

For  example,  two  of  the  worst  "killers"  in  the  whole  disease  world  are 
tuberculosis  and  cancer,  mainly  because  they  give  us  the  warning  after  it  is  too 
late.  Tuberculosis  can  be  quite  easily  cured  in  its  early  stages,  but  unfortunately 
it  is  a  painless  disease.  We  can  easily  be  suffering  from  an  advanced  case  of 
tuberculosis  and  yet  be  fairly  comfortable,  beyond  a  very  troublesome  cough 
and  a  feeling  of  continual  fatigue. 

Likewise  most  cases  of  cancer  could  be  cured  in  the  early  stages,  if  only 
medicine  could  locate  them.  But  cancer  also  uses  a  painless  attack  until  the 
disease  is  well  advanced.  When  we  finally  go  to  our  doctor  with  severe 
abdominal  pains  and  he  diagnoses  it  as  cancer,  we  might  as  well  call  the 
undertaker  the  next  day  and  get  our  earthly  affairs  in  order.  The  reader  is  very 
liable  to  become  much  too  enthusiastic  over  the  possible  uses  of  hypnotism.  It 
undoubtedly  has  it  uses,  and  we  will  deal  with  these  in  future  pages,  but  the 
obvious  use  is  often  more  apparent  than  real. 

We  can  render  any  of  the  sense  organs  anaesthetic.  Pain  gives  us  our  most 
graphic  results  but  vision  is  just  as  easily  influenced.  We  can  suggest  to  the 
subject  in  hypnotism  that  he  is  blind  and  to  all  outward  appearance  he  becomes 
so.  With  his  eyes  wide  open  he  will  walk  into  a  chair  or  make  no  movement  at 
all  when  someone  pretends  to  strike  him  in  the  face. 

Is  this  blindness  genuine  or  is  the  subject  again  staging  a  little  act  for  the 
benefit  of  those  present?  Very  probably  it  is  a  bona  fide  performance.  The 
subject  is  really  blind,  but  only  in  a  functional  sense.  It  might  be  well  to  explain 
what  we  mean  by  this  statement,  by  way  of  helping  us  to  understand  the 
problem. 

We  divide  human  ailments  into  two  broad  groups,  the  functional  and  the 
structural  or  organic.  For  example,  our  hospitals  for  mental  disease  always 
contain  a  large  group  of  insane  suffering  from  dementia  praecox,  or 
schizophrenia.  This  is  a  functional  insanity  as  there  seems  to  be  nothing  wrong 
with  the  brain.  If  we  examine  it  after  death  we  find  it  is  just  as  good  as  our  own. 
On  the  other  hand,  we  could  also  find  in  any  such  place  a  number  of  cases  with 
general  paresis,  generalized  syphilis  of  the  brain.  These  people  are  also  "crazy." 


Very  much  so  in  fact,  and  here  we  would  find  that  the  brain  had  been  severely 
damaged  by  the  syphilis  germ. 


Thus  with  insanity,  for  instance,  we  have  both  the  functional  and  structural 
cases,  both  equally  insane  but  in  the  former  the  brain  is  uninjured,  in  the 
structural  cases  the  brain  has  been  harmed  by  something,  be  it  syphilis,  sleeping 
sickness,  tumor,  stroke,  or  what  not. 

The  blindness  we  get  in  hypnotism  is  of  the  functional  type.  There  is  nothing 
whatsoever  wrong  with  the  eyes,  yet  it  is  very  real  for  all  that.  This  sounds  hazy 
and  mysterious  so  let  us  see  how  a  man  could  be  stone  blind  with  eyes  and 
brain  just  as  good  as  our  own.  In  order  to  see,  hear,  feel  pain,  or  experience  any 
sensation  at  all  the  action  of  nervous  tissue  must  be  involved.  I  1  ere  the  unit  is 
the  neuron,  the  separate  tiny  telegraph  line  which  nature  binds  together  in  the 
bundles  we  call  nerves. 

But  these  neurons  have  some  very  interesting  qualities  which  make  them  much 
better  than  our  own  human  made  wires.  The  most  interesting  point  about  the 
neuron,  from  our  point  of  view,  is  its  ability  to  break  contact.  Nervous  tissue  is, 
of  course,  all  over  the  body  but  the  brain  and  spinal  cord  are  the  chief  centers  of 
concentration.  Especially  in  the  brain  do  we  have  a  tremendously  complex 
telegraph  exchange. 

Literally  billions  of  these  tiny  wires  connect  with  each  other.  We  call  the  point 
of  contact  a  synapse,  and  here  very  fine  brush-like  structures  from  one  neuron 
come  very  close  to  those  from  another  so  that  the  "spark"  can  easily  jump  the 
gap.  As  we  learn  anything,  from  running  a  typewriter  to  Chinese,  pathways  are 
worn  through  the  "grey  matter,"  so  that  the  passage  of  the  nerve  current  over 
certain  synapses  becomes  much  more  easy. 

But  the  reverse  of  this  can  also  happen.  When  we  "forget"  it  is  a  sign  that  for 
some  reason  or  other  the  pathway  we  wish  to  use  has  become  blocked, 
probably  because  the  little  brushes  which  make  contact  at  the  synapses  have 
drawn  so  far  apart  that  the  current  cannot  pass.  It  seems  probable  that  in  sleep 
all  intercommunication  in  the  grey  matter  is  cut  off  in  this  way.  Similarly  when 
a  person  gets  "drunk"  or  is  knocked  unconscious  by  a  blow  on  the  head.  We 
could  also  quote  experiments  from  various  drugs,  such  as  arsenic,  to  uphold 
this  view.  Now  let  us  suppose  that  the  operator  suggests  to  his  subject  in 
hypnotism  that  his  whole  right  arm  is  senseless,  has  no  feeling  in  it.  If  the 
synapses  open  in  those  parts  of  the  brain  where  we  feel  pain  from  that  arm,  then 
the  nerve  currents  simply  cannot  register.  We  have  cut  off  communication  just 
as  effectively  as  if  we  cut  the  nerve  leading  from  the  arm,  yet  there  is  nothing 


wrong  with  the  brain.  Structurally,  it  is  perfect,  all  the  parts  are  there  and 
capable  of  working.  But  they  are  not  working  or  "functioning"  because  of  this 
break  at  the  synapses,  so  we  say  that  we  have  a  "functional"  anaesthesia  in  the 
arm.  And  this  "opening"  of  the  synapses  is  probably  due  here  to  suggestion. 
This  anaesthesia  is  very  real,  for  all  that.  No  amount  of  play  acting  would 
enable  any  subject  to  lie  quietly  on  the  operating  table  and  have  his  arm 
amputated.  Yet  this  can  be  done  in  deep  hypnotism.  Similarly  we  can  get  the 
functional  blindness  we  have  been  discussing.  In  this  case  it  is  very  difficult  to 
prove  that  the  subject  is  not  bluffing.  We  have  no  easy,  positive  tests,  but  we 
can  argue  from  the  analogy  of  anaesthesia  in  the  arm.  This  is  very  real,  so 
anaesthesia  in  vision  is  probably  just  as  real.  And,  of  course,  there  is  no 
"structural"  injury  to  the  brain. 

The  trouble  with  this  very  neat  synaptic  theory  is  that  it  is  almost  impossible  of 
proof,  though  it  seems  highly  probable.  We  can  see  the  synapse  under  the 
microscope,  but  we  cannot  see  its  movement  because  this  only  takes  place  in 
living  tissue  and  would  be  difficult  to  get  under  the  very  best  conditions.  We 
cannot  turn  a  microscope  on  the  brain  of  a  living  animal. 

Yet  some  day  we  may  be  able  to  actually  observe  these  movements  in  the 
synapses.  Several  years  ago  Spidell  of  the  University  of  Virginia  won  the 
highest  award  from  the  American  Association  for  the  Advancement  of  Science 
by  demonstrating  a  very  beautiful  technique.  He  was  actually  able  to  see  the 
growth  of  nerves  in  the  tail  of  a  living  tadpole!  That  may  strike  the  reader  as 
very  unimportant  but  science  values  curious  things.  A  year  or  two  previous  to 
this  another  man  got  this  award  by  showing  that  protozoa  in  the  intestines  of 
the  termite  digested  his  wood  diet  for  him  and  so  allowed  him  to  live  on  pure 
wood!  That  solved  many  a  problem  that  had  puzzled  the  zoologist.  Only  a  year 
or  two  ago  a  psychologist,  Maier,  won  the  coveted  award  by  demonstrating  that 
he  could  drive  rats  insane  by  frustration,  by  continually  puzzling  them  over  the 
location  of  their  food.  Silly?  That  experiment  means  a  great  deal  to  the 
psychiatrist,  the  "nerve  specialist,"  who  treats  the  human  insane. 

So  with  luck  in  the  near  future  we  may  actually  be  able  to  see  the  movement  at 
the  synapses  through  the  microscope.  At  present  it  is  a  very  neat  theory, 
probably  true  but  incapable  of  being  proven.  Yet  it  shows  us  how  all  these 
curious  things  may  happen  in  hypnotism  and  be  very  real,  yet  involve  no 
change  or  injury  to  the  brain.  When  the  psychologist  or  doctor  mentions  that 
word  "functional"  he  is  not  merely  throwing  up  a  smoke  screen  to  hide  his 
ignorance.  Functional  blindness  is  a  very  real  thing  as  thousands  of  "shell 
shock"  cases  from  the  war  can  testify. 


Similarly  by  means  of  hypnotism  we  can  obtain  functional  deafness  or 
anaesthesia  of  the  ear,  the  organ  of  hearing.  It  seems  to  be  very  real  for  the 
subject  is  quite  unconcerned  with  even  the  loudest  of  noises.  He  simply  ignores 
them.  A  little  more  spectacular  is  anaesthesia  of  smell.  We  have  already 
mentioned  the  fact  that  in  deep  hypnosis  the  subject  can  inhale  strong  ammonia 
without  a  quiver.  If  we  suggest  it  is  perfume,  he  even  enjoys  the  process  and 
that  involves  hallucination. 

Taste  is  equally  easy  to  reach,  for  the  subject  will  chew  up  and  swallow  the 
vilest  tasting  dishes  we  can  give  him  if  we  assure  him  that  he  tastes  nothing,  or 
even  better,  if  we  tell  him  he  is  eating  a  beef  steak.  All  these  weird  things  have 
a  sound  physiological  basis.  If  the  reader  would  really  understand  hypnotism  he 
must  banish  from  his  mind  all  trash  about  the  mystic  and  the  supernatural. 
Everything  is  to  be  explained  and  can  be  explained  by  the  activity  of  a  very 
complex  nervous  system.  With  hypnotism  we  can  cut  out  entire  memories  for 
certain  events  which  have  taken  place  in  past  years.  The  surgeon  can  do  the 
same  up  to  certain  limits,  but  he  must  injure  the  nerve  centers  permanently.  We 
can  make  the  shift  with  no  injury  and  at  far  greater  speed  than  any  telephone 
exchange. 

We  have  considered  the  matter  of  anaesthesia  of  the  various  senses.  How  about 
hyperesthesia?  We  heard  a  great  deal  about  this  in  days  past,  about  the  ability 
of  the  subject  to  develop  great  keenness  of  vision,  to  smell  the  very  faintest 
odors  or  heal  the  very  smallest  sounds.  Let  us  take  a  typical  experiment  as 
reported  by  Bergson,  a  French  philosopher  much  interested  in  hypnotism.  He 
had  one  very  excellent  subject,  a  boy,  with  whom  he  could  get  the  most  unusual 
phenomena.  Bergson  was  very  much  interested  in  the  matter  of  telepathy  or 
thought  transference,  and  with  this  boy  he  proved  it  to  his  satisfaction.  The 
subject  would  stand  up  facing  the  hypnotist  who  would  then  hold  an  open  book 
behind  the  subject's  head.  The  operator  would  thus  be  able  to  see  what  was  on 
the  pages  but  the  subject,  of  course,  could  not,  unless  he  had  eyes  in  the  back  of 
his  head. 

Bergson  was  then  delighted  to  find  that  the  hypnotized  boy  could  read  the 
printed  pages  which  only  the  operator  could  see.  He  had  proved  telepathy, 
which  was  a  great  achievement.  Or  had  he?  Bergson  was  a  very  careful 
investigator.  He  became  suspicious,  for  the  thing  worked  too  well.  Then  he 
made  an  astonishing  discovery.  The  boy  was  not  reading  his  mind  at  all  but  the 
reflection  of  the  book  in  the  hypnotist's  eyes!  The  letters  on  the  reflected  page 
would  have  been  about  1/256  of  an  inch  high;  in  other  words,  microscopic. 
Moreover,  having  once  discovered  the  trick,  Bergson  had  this  subject 
demonstrate  with  other  things,  such  as  photographs  reduced  to  very  tiny 


dimensions.  There  was  no  doubt  about  it.  This  particular  subject  in  hypnotism 
had  a  keenness  of  vision  which  was  equal  to  that  of  a  microscope. 

Unfortunately,  as  so  often  happens  when  we  consider  the  work  of  these  older 
authorities,  there  is  the  usual  joker.  No  one  has  been  able  to  repeat  Bergson's 
experiment,  and  proof  in  science  is  essentially  a  matter  of  repetition.  It  is  very 
difficult  to  say  why  this  experiment  cannot  be  repeated.  Certainly  no  one  would 
wish  to  accuse  Bergson  of  deliberate  fraud.  Very  probably  he  was  not  careful 
enough  with  his  controls;  he  did  not  watch  his  subject  closely.  At  any  rate,  all 
that  modern  science  can  do  is  reserve  judgment  and  hope  that  some  operator 
will  be  able  to  duplicate  his  results  under  proper  conditions.  Those  of  us  who 
are  familiar  with  the  older  type  of  hypnotism  know  of  another  experiment 
which  bears  on  this  subject  of  visual  acuity.  The  operator  would  take,  say, 
twenty  perfectly  blank  white  calling  cards  and  tell  the  subject  that  he  was  about 
to  show  him  some  photographs.  Then,  as  he  placed  these  blank  curds  before  the 
subject  he  would  stop  at  one  and  say,  "Look.  There  is  a  photograph  of  your 
mother.  Do  you  recognize  it?"  "Certainly." 

"Will  you  recognize  it  again?"  "Of  course." 

The  operator  made  a  slight  mark  on  the  back  of  this  card  W  that  he  would  be 
able  to  pick  it  out  again.  Then  he  continued  to  show  the  rest  of  the  pack.  Next 
he  shuffled  the  cards,  handed  them  to  the  subject  and  said,  "Now  pick  me  out 
your  mother's  photograph."  Strange  to  say,  the  subject  could  do  so!  The  writer 
has  been  able  to  demonstrate  this  himself  and  has  seen  it  done  by  others. 
Apparently  what  actually  happens  is  something  like  this.  The  subject  realizes 
that  he  is  supposed  to  remember  that  particular  card  so  he  looks  at  the  face  very 
carefully  and  remembers  some  very  trifling  difference  in  the  edge  of  the  card, 
picks  out  some  (law  in  its  surface  or  some  trifling  difference  in  texture.  When 
next  he  looks  over  the  cards  he  choses  his  mother's  "photograph"  by  the  card 
which  he  thus  remembers. 

This  would  not,  perhaps,  be  so  much  due  to  greater  intensity  of  vision  as 
intense  concentration  and  an  ability  to  remember  some  very  tiny  detail.  This  is 
not  as  farfetched  as  it  may  sound.  Those  of  the  readers  who  have  had  the 
pleasure  (  ?)  of  knowing  the  professional  gambler  and  the  opportunity  of 
studying  his  cards  realize  with  what  speed  and  accuracy  he  can  spot  his 
"marked"  cards  while  dealing  hands  to  four  or  five  at  once.  There  is  at  least  one 
concern  in  the  United  States  which  specializes  in  the  manufacture  of  such 
marked  decks,  the  "marking"  consisting  of  some  very  slight  variation  in  the 
pattern  on  the  backs  of  certain  key  cards.  If  the  average  human  in  his  normal 
state  can  arrive  at  such  perfection  through  practice,  there  is  no  reason  why  the 


hypnotic  subject,  with  his  great  powers  of  concentration  could  not  do  the  same. 
We  have  another  very  interesting  type  of  experiment  quoted  by  the  older 
writers.  This  involved  the  sense  of  smell.  They  would  take  the  handkerchiefs  of 
a  dozen  people,  allow  the  subject  to  smell  each  one,  then  mix  them  up  in  one 
mass  and  ask  the  subject  to  return  them  to  their  owner's.  And  the  subject  would 
oblige!  But  unfortunately  there  was  far  too  great  a  chance  of  the  subject  picking 
out  the  handkerchief  by  other  cues,  as  the  make  of  the  article,  or  expression  on 
the  owner's  face  to  allow  us  to  accept  these  old  experiments  at  their  face  value. 
At  present  the  verdict  of  psychology  on  hyperesthesia  is  "unproved."  As  a 
matter  of  fact  very  little  careful  work  has  been  done  on  this  subject  in  the 
laboratory.  Almost  the  only  good  piece  of  investigation  here  was  by  P.  C. 
Young  at  Harvard  and  he  says  that  the  senses  of  the  subject  in  hypnotism  are  no 
more  acute  than  they  are  in  the  normal  state.  We  must  simply  wait  for  more 
work.  The  writer  feels  that  hyperesthesia  probably  does  exist,  that  Young's 
negative  results  were  due  to  the  attitude  of  the  operator,  so  very  important  in  all 
this  work.  But  neither  can  the  writer  prove  his  point. 

It  might  be  well  here  to  explain  just  why  we  have  all  this  trouble  about  proving 
a  point.  Proof  in  science,  especially  in  psychology,  is  no  easy  matter.  First,  the 
individual  case  may  mean  very  little,  although  even  one  subject  who  could 
demonstrate  his  ability  consistently  could  do  a  lot.  But  in  general  we  must  have 
a  group  of  subjects  and  this  group  must  be  "statistically  significant,"  so  that  the 
results  cannot  be  charged  to  chance.  Such  a  group,  to  be  above  criticism  should 
number  at  least  seventy! 

Then  we  must  have  a  control  group,  who  have  not  been  hypnotized  with  which 
to  compare  the  experimental  group. 

This  should  be  just  as  large,  same  sex,  and  as  near  as  possible  the  same  age, 
education,  and  economic  status.  This  control  group  in  a  subject  like  hypnotism 
is  very  important  because  even  if  we  could  show  that  a  group  in  the  trance  did 
have  very  great  keenness  of  the  senses,  we  leave  ourselves  wide  open  to 
criticism.  How  do  we  know  they  could  not  do  the  same  in  the  waking  state?  Try 
and  find  out?  Not  at  all,  because  we  might  he  running  into  the  results  of 
posthypnotic  suggestions  given  without  intention  on  the  part  of  the  operator, 
something  we  will  discuss  in  the  next  chapter.  All  these  precautions  may 
appear  nonsense  to  the  average  reader  but  science  is  a  very  stern  taskmaster. 
Any  psychologist  who  runs  experiments  on  too  small  a  group,  or  on  a  group 
which  is  not  checked  against  a  properly  selected  control  group  may  prepare  for 
some  very  rough  sledding.  Needless  to  say,  the  task  of  preparing  seventy 
somnambulists  is  a  very  difficult  one.  Then  we  have  all  the  problems  of 
keeping  strict  observation  during  the  experiment.  So  the  reader  must  remember 


that  we  do  not  settle  these  problems  overnight  with  a  couple  of  subjects  or  by 
the  comfortable  "arm  chair  philosopher"  method.  There  is  probably  no  more 
difficult  branch  of  research  in  all  science,  so  please  be  lenient  when  we 
continually  say  that  such  and  such  results  are  still  in  doubt. 

There  can  be  no  doubt,  however,  about  delusions,  or  false  beliefs.  Do  not 
confuse  these  with  illusions  or  false  sense  impressions,  so  closely  related  to 
hallucinations.  For  example,  if  we  place  a  black  hat  on  the  table,  and  say  to  the 
subject,  "Look.  There  is  a  black  cat,"  he  will  pick  up  the  hat  and  caress  it  as  he 
would  a  cat.  It  is  a  false  sense  impression.  But  if  we  say  to  him,  "You  are  now  a 
dog.  Get  down  on  all  fours  and  bark.  There  is  another  dog  there  in  the  corner. 
Chase  him  from  the  room,"  he  will  give  a  ludicrous  imitation  of  a  dog.  This  is  a 
false  belief,  although  seeing  the  other  dog  was  an  hallucinationneat  little  points 
about  which  it  is  very  easy  to  become  tangled.  These  delusions,  as  we  will  see 
later,  may  be  of  the  very  greatest  importance,  especially  when  we  consider  the 
possible  tie  up  between  hypnotism  and  crime  in  a  later  chapter.  For  example, 
suppose  we  say  to  the  subject  in  hypnotism,  "You  are  Mayor  La  Guardia  of 
New  York  City.  I  want  you  to  give  a  political  speech."  He  will  do  his  best  to 
imitate  the  fiery  Mayor  and  may  give  an  astonishingly  good  speech.  He 
believes  himself  to  be  the  Mayor,  a  delusion  or  false  belief. 

Now  we  go  a  step  further  and  say,  "You  were  in  Utica  this  afternoon  between 
four  and  six  o'clock.  You  visited  the  station  and  while  there  you  saw  Mayor  La 
Guardia  pass  through  the  station  on  his  way  to  the  Hotel  Utica.  You  will 
maintain  this  when  you  wake  up."  When  he  awakens,  he  will  stoutly  insist 
against  all  argument  that  he  was  in  Utica  and  did  see  the  Mayor,  telling  how  he 
got  there,  how  he  got  back  and  weaving  a  story  which  at  least  sounds 
convincing.  Suppose  we  go  a  step  further.  "You  saw  the  Mayor  pass  through 
the  station.  Then  you  went  into  the  taproom.  There  you  overheard  two  men  at 
the  next  table  discussing  a  plot  to  assassinate  the  mayor  this  evening  as  he 
boarded  the  train  for  New  York  City.  Here  are  the  pictures  of  the  two  men.  Be 
sure  you  remember  them  for  you  will  see  them  again  tonight  at  the  Utica 
station."  Once  again  a  delusion,  mixed  with  hallucinations  and  the  posthypnotic 
suggestion,  but  primarly  a  delusion,  a  false  belief,  yet  one  which  might  make 
things  very  bad  for  two  innocent  men  in  Utica. 

These  delusions  can  be  extremely  real  and  the  subject  will  defend  them  even 
when  they  are  quite  impossible.  We  say  to  a  subject,  "You  were  in  the  first 
World  War  with  the  Americans.  You  then  went  under  the  name  of  Captain  G. 

N.  Smith.  Remember  this  when  you  wake  up."  When  he  awakens  we  bring  up 
the  subject  of  the  last  World  War.  He  volunteers  the  information  that  he  served 
in  it  under  the  name  of  Captain  G.  N.  Smith.  You  point  out  that  he  is  only 


twenty  five.  He  would  have  to  be  at  least  forty  five  if  his  story  were  true.  He 
maintains  he  really  is  forty  five  and  then  the  battle  is  on.  We  attack  him  on  all 
sides,  pointing  out  how  ridiculous  his  claim  is.  He  defends  himself  with  a 
beautiful  series  of  lies  and  finally  becomes  quite  indignant  when  we  continue  to 
doubt  his  word.  Of  course,  here  again  we  run  into  the  problem  of  whether  he  is 
just  bluffing,  playing  a  part  to  please  the  hypnotist  or  really  does  believe  he  was 
Captain  Smith  in  the  last  war-a  very  difficult  point  to  decide. 

So  also  are  those  curious  cases  which  we  call  "regression"  and  which  we  can 
get  in  hypnosis.  For  example,  we  take  a  subject  of  forty  years  old  and  say  to 
him,  "You  are  now  a  boy  of  five.  You  will  behave  and  think  exactly  as  you  did 
at  the  age  of  five."  He  gives  a  very  convincing  demonstration.  We  then  say, 
"Now  you  are  ten.  Grow  up  to  that  age."  He  does  so.  Next  we  have  him 
progress  to  fifteen.  Is  it  genuine?  It  certainly  looks  like  a  good  case  of  faking. 
But  strange  to  say,  if  we  try  him  out  with  the  intelligence  test  we  find  that  he 
hits  the  proper  mental  age  and  intelligence  quotient  with  very  considerable 
accuracy.  Of  course,  he  could  also  fake  this  but  it  is  very  doubtful  if  any  of  the 
readers,  unfamiliar  with  intelligence  tests,  could  give  the  proper  answers  for  a 
child  of  five,  ten,  or  fifteen.  It  really  looks  like  genuine  regression  which  we 
know  does  take  place  in  actual  life.  Much  more  work  must  be  done  on  this 
subject,  most  up  to  the  present  being  in  Russia  and  perhaps  not  too  carefully 
supervised.  We  hear  much  in  some  literature  about  the  ability  which  subjects 
have  to  reckon  time  in  hypnosis.  We  can  tell  them  that  they  will  be  able  to  tell 
exactly  when  4453  minutes  have  passed  and  they  will  call  the  time  exactly. 
Once  again,  not  proved  to  the  satisfaction  of  science.  For  example,  one  of  the 
older  experimenters,  Bramwell,  working  around  1 895  found  that  one  particular 
subject  could  actually  call  the  time  to  the  exact  minute. 

But  unfortunately  he  had  no  control  subjects.  What  guarantee  do  we  have  that 
this  subject  or  any  of  the  readers  could  not  do  the  same  thing  in  the  normal 
waking  state?  Ridiculous!  Not  at  all!  Try  it  on  yourself.  When  you  are  lying 
quiet  and  relaxed,  note  how  very  steady  is  the  heart  beat.  If  it  is  sixty  eight  to 
the  minute  it  will  not  vary  more  than  one  or  two  strokes  in  an  hour.  It  is  a 
simple  matter  of  counting.  If  the  subject  is  allowed  to  awaken,  the  very  strictest 
watch  would  have  to  be  kept  that  he  was  not  counting  the  ticks  on  a  clock, 
listening  to  the  town  clock  or  actually  consulting  his  own  watch.  In  the 
psychological  laboratory,  at  least  up  to  the  present  time,  we  find  no  evidence  of 
such  capacity.  Stalnaker  and  Richardson  have  done  the  best  work  here  and  their 
results  show  no  increase  in  ability  along  these  lines.  Another  example  of  why 
we  must  be  very  critical  of  the  work  by  the  older  authorities.  The  writer  always 
suspects  that  in  these  laboratory  experiments  the  operator  has  the  wrong 


attitude.  He  is  out  to  "debunk"  hypnotism,  the  subject  realizes  this,  and  helps  in 
the  de-bunking  process  with  all  his  ability.  We  have  considerable  evidence  for 
this  in  some  experiments  but  only  time  and  much  work  will  tell  how  important 
operator-attitude  may  be. 

It  is  very  easy  to  make  serious  mistakes  in  hypnotism.  The  writer  has  made  at 
least  one  he  knew  of,  possibly  many  more.  We  use  in  psychology  a  very  neat 
little  piece  of  apparatus  to  measure  the  "psycho-galvanic  reflex."  This  measures 
the  resistence  of  the  body  to  a  very  small  current  of  electricity,  the  resistance 
generally  being  taken  through  the  hand.  It  is  a  very  curious  thing  that  this 
resistance  changes  under  any  emotional  strain.  Suppose  it  is  normally  5,000 
ohms.  The  experimenter  pricks  the  subject  with  a  pin.  Immediately  the 
resistance  drops  to  4,000  ohms,  swinging  back  again  to  5,000  after  about  half  a 
minute. 

Equally  interesting  is  the  curious  behavior  of  skin  resistance  in  sleep.  It  will 
normally  go  to  40,000  or  50,000  ohms.  The  writer  found  in  a  series  of 
experiments  that  the  skin  resistance  of  a  subject  when  hypnotized  also  soared  to 
50,000  ohms.  This  proved  conclusively  that  hypnotism  and  sleep  were  closely 
associated.  The  writer  publishes  his  results-and  they  were  found  to  be 
completely  misleading.  They  were  good  as  far  as  they  went,  only  they  did  not 
go  far  enough.  Other  experimenters  demonstrated  that  while  this  was  true  for 
hypnotism  induced  by  the  "sleeping"  method,  it  was  true  only  for  this  method 
and  only  as  long  as  the  subject  remained  quiet.  The  moment  he  got  up  and 
walked  around  his  resistance  became  that  of  the  normal  waking  subject. 

Now,  of  course,  the  writer  should  have  taken  all  this  into  consideration  before 
publishing  results,  but  man  is  just  mere  man.  Science  progresses  by  such 
mistakes.  One  research  worker  finds  the  subject  will  commit  a  crime  in 
hypnosis.  Another  goes  out  to  prove  him  wrong-and  does  so  to  his  satisfaction. 
Then  the  fat  is  in  the  fire  until  one  backs  down  or  the  consensus  of  scientific 
opinion  proves  him  wrong.  The  writer  has  backed  down  at  least  once,  may  do 
so  many  more  times,  so  it  ill  becomes  him  to  criticize  others  too  severely.  The 
reader  must  realize  that  his  opinions  on  some  points  as  expressed  in  later 
chapters  of  this  book  are  only  his  opinions.  He  is  convinced  that  the  weight  of 
scientific  evidence  is  on  his  side,  but  hypnotism,  of  all  subjects,  does  not  lend 
itself  to  dogmatism.  We  must  await  very  extensive  research  before  we  have  the 
final  answer  to  many  problems. 

Clairvoyance,  the  ability  to  see  distant  scenes,  is  one  such  example.  Many  of 
the  older  authorities  were  quite  positive  that  their  subjects  could  describe 
events  hundreds  of  miles  away,  say  in  the  old  home  town.  The  writer  has  often 


met  amateur  operators  who  would  proudly  show  how  a  subject  could  tell  just 
what  was  taking  place  in  some  town  of  Tennessee  or  Kansas.  But  they  never 
took  the  trouble  to  check  up!  F.  W.  H.  Myers  in  his  Human  Personality  and  its 
Survival  o  f  Bodily  Death  seems  to  have  felt  that  in  hypnotism  the  psychic  or 
supernatural  powers  of  some  subjects  could  be  increased. 

But  modern  psychology  brings  in  another  verdict  of  "unproved,"  in  this  case 
very  highly  improbable  that  it  ever  can  be  proved.  The  reader  should  get  a  clear 
distinction  in  his  mind. 

For  example,  there  is  not  a  reputable  psychologist  in  the  United  States  who 
would  dare  write  an  article  questioning  the  existence  of  hypnotism  and  certain 
phenomena  in  hypnotism.  His  reputation  would  be  ruined. 

With  reference  to  spiritism,  and  psychic  research,  the  exact  opposite  is  true.  No 
one  would  dare  say  that  clairvoyance  or  mind  reading,  as  two  examples  of  such 
phenomena,  were  proved.  Some,  such  as  J.  B.  Rhine  at  Duke  University  might 
say  they  believed  in  the  existence  of  telepathy,  even  had  a  certain  amount  of 
evidence  in  its  favor,  but  proof  ?  That  is  something  quite  different  again.  A 
blunt  assertion  that  the  matter  was  settled  to  the  satisfaction  of  psychology 
would  find  ninetynine  per  cent  of  the  psychologists  registering  an  emphatic 
"no."  This  applies  to  all  so-called  spiritistic  phenomena. 

We  further  note  that  recent  work  by  the  group  at  Duke  University  interested  in 
extra-sensory  perception  shows  that  hypnotism  has  nothing  whatsoever  to  do 
with  the  abilities  of  people  along  these  super-normal  lines.  So  the  reader  will 
realize  that  hypnotism  has  no  relation  to  spiritism  or  the  supernatural.  In  later 
pages  we  will  use  hypnotism  as  a  means  by  which  to  explain  the  trance  state  of 
the  medium.  Also  such  phenomena  as  automatic  writing,  crystal  gazing, 
automatic  speech,  even  talking  with  the  dead.  But  even  so  we  shall  see  that  the 
things  we  find  are  quite  normal,  quite  within  the  limits  of  what  might  be 
expected  in  the  teachings  of  psychology. 

The  reader  who  is  familiar  with  hypnotism  cannot  have  failed  to  note  that  we 
have  not  mentioned  several  of  the  more  interesting  phenomena.  For  example, 
the  famous  posthypnotic  suggestion  and  also  autosuggestion.  These  are  so  very 
important  that  we  cannot  treat  them  in  this  short  space,  so  we  devote  the  next 
chapter  to  their  consideration. 

Then  there  is  that  very  interesting  question  of  dissociation,  considered  by  some 
the  key  phenomenon  of  hypnotism.  We  prefer  to  deal  with  this  problem  in  our 


chapter,  The  Nature  of  Hypnotism,  since  it  is  so  closely  linked  with  the  entire 
theory  of  hypnosis. 


Also  we  have  avoided  mentioning  one  of  the  most  useful  of  all  hypnotic 
phenomena,  at  least  from  the  viewpoint  of  medicine.  This  is  that  curious  ability 
which  the  somnambulist  has  to  recall  long  forgotten  childhood  memories.  This 
is  the  keynote  of  "hypno-analysis,"  a  branch  of  psychotherapy  which  is 
destined  to  assume  more  and  more  importance  as  the  prejudice  to  hypnotism  in 
this  country  diminishes. 

Associated  with  this  is  hypermnesia,  wherein  the  subject  in  hypnotism  or  as  a 
result  of  posthypnotic  suggestion  is  supposed  to  develop  a  much  better  memory 
for  things  which  have  occurred  in  the  immediate  past,  such  as  the  learning  of 
poetry  or  of  history.  This  we  postpone  until  we  consider  the  possible  uses  of 
hypnotism  in  education. 

Then  we  might  mention  other  curiosities  of  the  trance  which  we  leave  to  later 
chapters,  such  as  the  ability  to  form  conditioned  reflexes  and  persistence  of 
normal  reflexes,  all  important  but  best  reserved  to  our  chapter  on  theory.  Will 
the  subject  in  hypnotism  commit  a  criminal  act?  Even  more  interesting,  will  he 
confess  to  crime  in  the  trance  state?  Obviously  these  questions  involve  some 
very  important  phenomena  of  hypnotism.  Just  as  obviously  these  questions 
cannot  be  answered  in  a  few  pages  so  we  devote  a  later  chapter  to  this  whole 
question  of  the  connection  between  hypnotism  and  crime. 

Here  we  have  only  presented  the  more  spectacular  side  of  hypnotism,  things 
which  can-or  cannot-be  demonstrated  in  five  minutes  with  any  good  subject. 
Far  more  important  to  psychology  are  the  questions  of  hypnotism  in  education, 
in  crime,  even  its  possible  uses  in  war.  These,  we  will  see,  can  only  be 
investigated  by  very  long  and  careful  work.  Some,  indeed,  cannot  even  be 
studied  properly  in  our  present  day  society.  The  solution  must  wait  for  the 
future.  But  the  past  few  pages  cover  most  of  those  things  which  the  lawman 
associates  with  the  word  hypnotism.  We  now  pass  on  to  the  more  unusual 
phenomena  concerning  which  the  average  reader  probably  knows  very  little. 

Chapter  3 

THE  POSTHYPNOTIC  SUGGESTION  AND  AUTOSUGGESTION 

THERE  is  a  rule  in  hypnotism  that  everything  we  get  in  the  trance  can  also  be 
obtained  by  means  of  the  posthypnotic  suggestion.  Also,  that  anything  we  find 
in  either  can  be  found  in  autosuggestion;  and,  finally,  that  everything  we  obtain 
in  any  of  the  three  will  be  encountered  in  everyday  life.  In  this  latter  case  we 


refer  to  the  subject  as  hysteric,  neurotic,  or  even  insane  and  will  leave  the 
consideration  of  these  everyday  cases  to  a  later  chapter  on  mental  disease. 

Let  us  take  a  typical  posthypnotic  suggestion.  The  operator  says  to  the  subject 
in  somnambulism,  "Now  listen  carefully.  After  you  wake  up,  I  will  show  you 
the  ace  of  spades  from  a  pack  of  cards.  When  I  do  this,  you  will  see  a  black  dog 
come  in  through  the  door.  He  is  a  very  friendly  dog,  so  you  will  pet  him,  then 
you  will  give  him  a  bone.  He  belongs  to  Professor  Fowler  so,  after  you  have 
fed  him,  you  will  call  Fowler  on  the  telephone  and  ask  him  to  come  get  the 
dog."  The  operator  repeats  these  instructions  and  asks  the  subject  if  he 
understands  them  thoroughly.  Then  the  subject  is  awakened. 

Five  minutes  later  the  hypnotist  picks  up  a  deck  of  cards,  selects  the  ace  of 
spades,  and  lays  it  on  the  table  in  front  of  the  subject.  The  latter  seems  wide 
awake  in  every  sense  of  the  word.  He  glances  at  the  door  and  says,  "Why,  here 
is  Fowler's  dog.  He  looks  hungry.  Come  on  in,  fellow,  and  have  a  bone."  He 
pats  the  phantom  dog,  takes  a  plate  from  the  table,  puts  on  it  an  imaginary 
bone,  and  continues  to  fondle  the  dog  as  he  eats  it.  Then  he  suddenly  says, 

"You  know,  I  don't  believe  Fowler  knows  where  that  dog  is.  I  think  I'll  call  him 
on  the  telephone  and  let  him  know." 

So  he  goes  to  the  phone  and  puts  through  his  call,  all  the  time  talking  in  a 
perfectly  normal  manner  about  his  garden,  his  auto  or  any  other  topic  of 
conversation  in  which  he  may  have  been  engaged.  Fowler,  who  knows  what  is 
happening,  comes  over  for  a  cup  of  tea.  All  the  time  he  is  in  the  room  the 
subject  keeps  playing  with  the  dog  and  finally  says  good  day  to  the  professor 
and  his  phantom  pet  in  quite  normal  fashion. 

Such  is  the  typical  picture  of  a  posthypnotic  suggestion.  Some  subjects  act  in  a 
dazed  condition  while  carrying  out  such  orders  but  this  is  easily  corrected  by 
the  suggestion  that  they  will  be  wide  awake  and  perfectly  normal  during  the 
whole  procedure. 

Let  us  examine  this  type  of  suggestion  more  closely,  far  as  we  will  see  later  it 
explains  a  great  deal  in  abnormal  psychology.  It  is  a  curious  thing  that  the 
subject  does  not  have  to  be  in  the  deepest  trance  or  in  somnambulism  to  get  the 
posthypnotic  suggestion.  To  be  sure  it  is  much  better  if  we  start  off  from  the 
deep  state,  but  not  absolutely  necessary.  We  say  to  a  subject  in  hypnotism, 
"After  you  awaken,  I  will  tap  three  times  on  the  table  with  my  pencil.  You  will 
then  have  an  irresistible  impulse  to  take  off  your  right  shoe."  Then  we  awaken 
him  and  find  out  that  he  remembers  everything.  Nevertheless  we  tap  three 
times  on  the  table  and  at  once  there  is  clear  evidence  of  an  inner  conflict.  He 


wants  to  take  off  that  shoe  but  has  made  up  his  mind  he  will  not.  Like  one 
possessed  of  a  devil,  he  runs  his  hands  through  his  hair,  shakes  his  head,  gets 
up  and  walks  around  the  room  muttering  to  himself,  "I  won't.  I  won't  do  it." 
Finally  the  strain  becomes  too  great  and  he  says,  "Oh!  All  right,  then.  Have  it 
your  own  way."  He  takes  off  the  shoe  and  sits  down  looking  vastly  relieved. 
While  we  can  get  this  reaction  in  some  subjects  who  do  not  enter 
somnambulism,  in  general  they  can  fight  off  the  suggestion.  They  still  show 
evidence  of  a  desire  to  carry  out  the  order,  but  will  sit  still,  grit  their  teeth, 
smile  triumphantly  and  say,  "No."  And  in  most  of  these  cases  "no"  means  "no." 

At  this  point,  we  should  mention  a  very  necessary  precaution  which  should  be 
taken  in  all  this  work.  The  subject  must  never  leave  the  room  until  the 
suggestion  has  been  removed.  There  are  two  ways  of  doing  this.  Re-hypnotize 
the  subject  and  remove  the  suggestion,  or,  far  easier,  have  him  carry  it  out  with 
his  own  consent.  Simply  say,  "Very  well.  That  test  failed  but  I  want  to  make 
sure  that  we  have  no  trouble  with  it  in  the  future.  Take  off  your  shoe  and  put  in 
on  again,  just  to  clear  the  wires." 

A  doctor  friend  reports  a  very  interesting  case  which  happened  to  him  twenty 
years  ago.  A  patient  came  complaining  that  he  was  being  followed  by  a  big, 
black  dog.  The  patient  knew  quite  well  that  there  was  no  dog  around,  but  for  all 
that  he  could  not  escape  from  the  delusion  that  this  dog  was  always  at  his  heels. 
The  doctor  worked  with  him  for  a  week  with  no  success.  Then  the  patient 
himself  gave  the  answer.  A  stage  hypnotist  had  been  in  town.  He  had 
volunteered  as  a  subject,  went  into  deep  trance  and  remembered  nothing  of 
what  happened  until  he  was  awakened  at  the  end  of  the  show.  But  the  next  day 
this  dog  delusion  started  and  had  been  with  him  ever  since. 

The  doctor  found  the  answer  in  short  order.  Inquiring  among  his  friends  he 
found  that  the  subject,  the  night  of  the  show,  had  kept  the  house  entertained  by 
running  around  the  stage  for  half  an  hour  always  pursued  by  a  big,  black  dog. 
He  was  one  of  several  subjects  and  this  was  his  "stunt."  He  was  hypnotized  at 
once,  the  posthypnotic  suggestion  removed,  and,  after  a  couple  of  seances,  had 
finally  got  rid  of  his  phantom  friend. 

One  of  the  real  dangers  of  hypnotism  lies  right  here.  We  may  easily  instill  in 
the  subject's  mind  some  conflict,  without  in  any  way  intending  the  same.  One 
of  our  best  operators  reports  the  following  case.  The  subject,  in  deep  trance, 
was  told  to  drink  a  glass  of  whisky.  He  was  a  prohibitionist,  had  never  tasted 
liquor  and  refused.  But  the  day  after  the  trance,  he  told  the  hypnotist  that,  for 
some  unknown  reason,  he  had  developed  a 


crazy  idea  of  entering  every  saloon  he  passed  and  having  a  glass  of  whisky. 

The  operator  said  nothing,  re-hypnotized  the  subject  and  this  time  took  care 
that  he  removed  all  posthypnotic  suggestions. 

The  best  procedure  is  as  follows.  After  each  trance,  if  any  posthypnotic 
suggestions  have  been  given,  explain  to  the  subject  in  the  waking  state  just 
what  has  occurred.  Then  assure  him  that  the  suggestion  in  question  has  now 
been  completely  removed.  If  he  has  any  hint  of  its  still  persisting,  he  is  to  look 
up  the  operator  at  once.  With  experience  the  hypnotist  will  never  have  any 
trouble  along  these  lines  but  he  must  always  realize  that  he  must  exercise  great 
care. 

There  are  two  outstanding  facts  about  these  posthypnotic  suggestions  which 
link  them  very  closely  to  the  so-called  Freudian  "complex."  First,  these 
suggestions,  as  do  those  in  hypnosis  proper,  have  a  very  curious  compulsive 
force.  When  given  to  a  subject  in  somnambulism  they  simply  "must"  be  carried 
out.  The  writer  recalls  one  very  interesting  example  while  doing  graduate  work 
at  Harvard.  Professor  William  McDougall  was  always  greatly  interested  in 
hypnotism.  Under  his  leadership  some  very  valuable  research  work  was  always 
under  way. 

On  one  occasion  a  group  was  gathered  in  his  office.  One  of  these  graduate 
students  was  an  excellent  hypnotic  subject  and  the  professor  hypnotized  him. 
Before  awakening  the  subject,  McDougall  said,  "When  I  light  my  cigarette,  you 
will  take  the  ace  of  spades  from  the  pack  of  cards  on  the  table  and  hand  it  to 
me."  Then  he  awakened  the  subject  and  later  lit  his  cigarette. 

Now  it  happened  that  this  particular  subject  was  greatly  interested  in  hypnotism 
and  quite  familiar  with  its  use.  He  at  once  reached  over  for  the  pack  of  cards, 
then  suddenly  stopped. 

"Do  you  know,"  he  said,  "I  believe  that  is  a  posthypnotic  suggestion."  "Very 
probably,"  McDougall  replied,  "what  do  you  want  to  do?"  "I  want  to  give  you 
the  ace  of  spades."  "That's  right.  It  is  a  posthypnotic  suggestion.  What  are  you 
going  to  do  about  it?"  "I  won't  do  it."  "I  bet  you  fifty  cents  you  will."  "Taken." 

Then  came  a  very  neat  demonstration  of  this  compulsive  power  of  the 
suggestion.  The  subject  was  obviously  in  difficulties.  Extremely  restless,  he 
would  keep  drifting  toward  that  pack  of  cards,  then  pull  himself  together,  and 
sit  down  only  to  be  on  his  feet  again  in  a  minute's  time  wandering  around  the 
room  in  a  most  unhappy  fashion.  But  he  did  resist  and  at  the  end  of  an  hour  and 
a  half  he  collected  his  fifty  cents,  wiped  his  brow,  and  left  the  room. 


But  his  troubles  had  only  started.  McDougall  had  purposely  omitted  removing 
the  suggestion.  The  subject  had  a  great  deal  of  work  to  do  but  simply  could  not 
settle  down.  He  was  haunted  by  the  ace  of  spades.  Finally  at  four  o'clock  in  the 
afternoon  he  gave  up  the  struggle,  returned  to  the  building,  had  the  janitor  let 
him  into  the  office,  got  the  ace  of  spades,  looked  up  the  hypnotist  at  his  home, 
and  handed  it  over  plus  a  one  dollar  bill. 

These  compulsions  arising  from  the  posthypnotic  suggestion  work  in  very 
curious  ways.  For  example,  we  say  to  a  subject,  "When  you  awaken  I  will  reach 
for  a  cigarette.  You  will  then  hand  me  the  ash  try  from  the  mantelpiece."  When 
he  is  wide  awake  the  operator  reaches  for  his  cigarette  and  the  subject  promptly 
hands  him  the  ash  tray. 

"Why  did  you  hand  me  that  tray?"  The  subject  looks  puzzled.  "Well,  why  not? 
You  are  smoking  and  have  no  ash  tray."  "It  was  a  posthypnotic  suggestion.  See 
if  you  can  pick  out  the  next  one  and  resist  it." 

We  try  again.  This  time  we  say,  "When  I  stand  up  to  leave  the  room  you  will 
hand  me  a  coat.  By  accident,  however,  you  will  hand  me  Mr.  Jones'  coat,  the 
one  with  the  velvet  collar."  This  time  when  we  stand  up,  he  immediately  hands 
us  Jones'  coat,  then  notices  his  mistake  and  apologizes  profusely.  We  say, 
"Fooled  again!  Another  posthypnotic  suggestion.  See  if  you  can  catch  us." 

In  hypnotism  we  then  say,  "When  you  awaken  we  will  mention  the  shipping 
losses  caused  by  the  submarines.  You  will  then  reach  for  the  New  York  Times 
and  quote  us  the  losses  for  the  last  four  weeks." 

He  is  awakened.  Five  minutes  later  the  hypnotist  mentions  shipping  losses.  He 
promptly  reaches  for  the  Times  and  just  as  promptly  stops. 

"No,  you  don't.  Not  this  time.  That  is  a  posthypnotic  suggestion.  I  won't  carry  it 
out."  "How  do  you  know  it  is  a  posthypnotic  suggestion?"  "I  just  feel  it  in  my 
bones.  Sort  of  an  urge  to  do  it  and  a  very  uncomfortable  feeling  when  I  resist. 
That  feeling  would  never  come  from  anything  else."  "I  bet  you  can't  resist  it." 
"Yes,  I  can.  Much  as  I  want  to  get  my  hands  on  that  Times,  the  thing  is  not 
irresistible."  "Very  well.  Look  up  the  figures  any  how  just  to  ease  your  mind." 

This  subject,  highly  intelligent  and  himself  a  psychologist,  could  pick  out  the 
curious  drive  to  carry  out  the  suggestion  and  so  was  able  to  identify  it.  The 
reader  will  note  a  point  which  is  very  important  for  later  discussion.  The 
subject  tends  to  carry  out  these  suggestions  without  any  hesitation,  especially 
when  they  fit  into  the  social  situation  in  which  he  finds  himself.  However, 


immediately  he  finds  out  the  cause  of  his  actions,  he  just  as  quickly  decides  to 
resist.  Whether  this  resistance  will  be  effective  depends  on  many  factors, 
especially  the  depth  of  the  trance  and  the  attitude  of  the  hypnotist.  Sidis  in  his 
Psychology  o  f  Suggestion  brings  out  the  importance  of  operator  attitude  very 
clearly.  He  quotes  from  his  very  wide  experience  to  show  that  the  subject  will 
resist  a  suggestion  if  he  has  the  least  idea  that  the  operator  does  not  fully  expect 
him  to  comply.  On  the  other  hand,  if  the  hypnotist  makes  his  suggestions  in  a 
firm  voice  which  does  not  express  the  slightest  doubt  as  to  their  acceptance  the 
order  will  be  obeyed. 

Science  here  tends  to  lean  over  backward  in  its  effort  to  become  scientific  and 
in  doing  so  becomes  very  unscientific.  We  cannot  adopt  completely  the 
methods  of  the  physical  sciences,  such  as  chemistry.  The  attitude  of  the 
experimenter  matters  nothing  here.  If  he  adds  zinc  to  sulphuric  acid,  the  result 
is  quite  clear  cut  and  definite,  whatever  may  be  his  attitude.  But  in  suggestion 
this  attitude  is  tremendously  significant.  A  suggestion  given  in  a  voice  which 
does  not  express  conviction  is  not  nearly  as  potent  as  one  given  with 
determination  and  force. 

We  do  not  have  to  experiment  with  hypnotism  to  see  the  truth  of  this  statement. 
Any  effective  public  speaker  knows  that  confidence,  conviction,  and  force  are 
necessary  to  sway  his  audience.  We  will  later  see  that  a  Hitler  uses  all  the 
techniques  of  a  stage  hypnotist  and  uses  them  with  excellent  results. 

So  we  must  always  bear  in  mind  that;  while  psychology  claims  to  be  a  science 
and  to  follow  the  scientific  method,  this  personal  factor  introduces  an  element 
which  is  quite  foreign  to  chemistry,  physics  or  geology.  The  psychologist,  in 
his  determination  to  get  standard  conditions,  may,  in  some  cases,  completely 
defeat  his  own  ends  and  become  a  very  unscientific  scientist.  Hypnotism 
supplies  us  with  our  most  glaring  examples  and,  for  this  reason,  hypnotism  is 
probably  the  most  difficult  of  all  subjects  in  psychology  to  investigate.  The 
personality  of  the  operator  is  of  such  great  importance. 

The  reader  must  bear  this  constantly  in  mind  when,  in  later  pages,  we  discuss 
such  subjects  as  the  possible  use  of  hypnotism  for  criminal  ends  and  for  the 
detection  of  crime.  Here  we  will  see  that  some  of  our  very  best  men,  such  as  M. 
H.  Erickson  at  Eloise  State  Hospital,  are  emphatic  that  hypnotism  cannot  be 
used  in  either  situation.  But  we  will  also  see  that  others  of  equal  reputation,  as 
W.  R.  Wells  of  Syracuse  University  or  L.  W.  Rowland  of  University  of  Tulsa, 
are  just  as  emphatic  that  it  can.  This  presents  a  very  confusing  picture  to  the 
average  reader  and  tends  to  discredit  this  branch  of  psychology.  Actually  such 


results  must  be  expected  until  we  find  some  way  of  evaluating  the  personal 
factors  of  both  the  hypnotist  and  the  subject. 


There  is  a  second  characteristic  of  the  posthypnotic  suggestion  which  is  of  the 
very  greatest  importance.  This  we  term  rationalization.  The  subject  tends  to 
rationalize,  to  find  excuses  for  his  actions  and,  strange  to  say,  while  these 
excuses  may  be  utterly  false,  the  subject  tends  to  believe  them. 

For  example,  the  writer  says  to  a  very  good  somnambulist,  "After  you  awaken  I 
will  sit  down  by  the  piano.  You  will  then  go  to  the  bookshelves,  select  the  third 
book  from  the  left  hand  side,  second  row  from  the  top,  turn  to  page  127  and 
read  the  first  paragraph."  The  subject  remembers  nothing  of  what  the  operator 
has  said,  yet,  when  he  seats  himself  by  the  piano,  the  subject  wanders  over  to 
the  library,  selects  the  proper  book,  opens  to  page  127  and  starts  reading.  It 
happens  to  be  a  textbook  on  biology. 

The  operator  interrupts.  "Why  are  you  reading  that  stuff  to  me?"  "Well, 
yesterday  I  had  an  argument  with  Professor  Smith  about  the  action  of  the 
chromosomes  in  reduction-division,  and  I  thought  you  could  help  me  out."  The 
subject  was  a  medical  student,  the  story  fitted  together  neatly,  and  he  evidently 
believed  it-only  it  was  quite  untrue.  He  had  not  seen  Professor  Smith  for  a 
week  and  had  had  no  argument  about  the  action  of  the  chromosomes.  This  case 
is  typical.  The  subject  always  finds  an  excuse  to  justify  his  conduct,  and  this 
conduct  may  be  pretty  hard  to  justify,  as  in  the  following  case. 

The  operator  hypnotizes  a  subject  and  tells  him  that  when  te  cuckoo  clock 
strikes  he  will  walk  up  to  Mr.  White,  put  a  lamp  shade  on  his  head,  kneel  on  the 
floor  in  front  of  him  and  "cuckoo"  three  times.  Mr.  White  was  not  the  type  on 
whom  one  played  practical  jokes,  in  fact,  he  was  a  morose,  nonhumorous  sort 
of  individual  who  would  fit  very  badly  in  such  a  picture.  Yet,  when  the  cuckoo 
clock  struck,  the  subject  carried  out  the  suggestion  to  the  letter. 

"What  in  the  world  are  you  doing?"  he  was  asked.  "Well,  I'll  tell  you.  It  sounds 
queer  but  it's  just  a  little  experiment  in  psychology.  I've  been  reading  on  the 
psychology  of  humor  and  I  thought  I'd  see  how  you  folks  reacted  to  a  joke  that 
was  in  very  bad  taste.  Please  pardon  me,  Mr.  White,  no  offence  intended 
whatsoever,"  and  the  subject  sat  down  without  the  slightest  realization  of 
having  acted  under  posthypnotic  compulsion. 

Next  came  a  very  curious  situation.  Mr.  White  was  a  lawyer  and  interested  in 
the  whole  problem  of  hypnotism  in  crime.  "Do  you  think  hypnotism  is 
dangerous?"  he  asked  the  subject.  "I'm  sorry  but  I  know  nothing  about 


hypnotism,"  came  the  puzzled  reply.  "But  you  were  hypnotized  only  five 
minutes  ago."  "Now  you're  having  your  little  joke,  but  I  have  never  been 
hypnotized  in  all  my  life."  "I  certainly  saw  you  in  hypnotism  right  in  this  room 
not  five  minutes  back."  "You  certainly  saw  no  such  thing.  I  know  nothing  about 
hypnotism,  never  have  been  hypnotized,  and  know  that  no  one  could  put  me  to 
sleep." 

It  is  a  very  curious  thing  that,  with  the  use  of  the  posthypnotic  suggestion,  we 
can  remove  from  the  subject  all  knowledge  of  ever  being  in  the  trance.  We 
merely  assure  him  in  hypnotism,  "In  future  you  will  have  no  memory  of  ever 
being  asleep.  You  will  remember  nothing  about  hypnotism  but  will  insist  that 
you  have  never  been  hypnotized  in  all  your  life." 

After  such  a  suggestion  has  been  repeated  a  few  times  the  subject  has  no 
knowledge  of  going  into  trance.  We  seat  ourselves  opposite  him  at  the  table.  He 
is  hypnotized  and  we  talk  along  for  half  an  hour.  Then  we  awaken  him  and  he 
at  once  picks  up  the  conversation  where  he  left  off  before  being  hypnotized. 

We  ask  him  about  the  trance  and  he  looks  puzzled.  He  is  quite  sure  that  we 
have  been  talking  quietly  in  our  chairs  ever  since  he  entered  the  room.  When  he 
is  told  that  he  was  in  the  trance,  and  is  a  good  subject,  he  is  inclined  to  think 
that  we  are  trying  to  play  a  very  poor  joke  on  him.  He  reacts  in  exactly  the 
same  way  as  would  the  reader  if  his  doctor  were  suddenly  to  enter  the  room  and 
tell  him  that  for  the  last  hour  he  had  been  walking  in  his  sleep.  The  whole  thing 
doesn't  make  sense  and  the  subject  says  so. 

We  can  go  even  farther  with  the  posthypnotic  suggestion.  Not  only  can  we, 
with  its  aid,  remove  all  knowledge  from  the  subject  of  ever  having  been 
hypnotized;  we  can  make  it  impossible  for  anyone  beside  the  operator  to 
hypnotize  him  at  any  future  date.  This  again  is  the  result  of  suggestion  in  the 
hypnotic  trance.  After  such  a  suggestion  the  subject,  no  matter  how  good  a 
somnambulist  he  may  have  been,  becomes  the  most  obstinate  of  all  people 
when  we  try  to  get  the  trance. 

In  the  waking  state  he  not  only  denies  that  he  has  ever  been  hypnotized  but  is 
very  unwilling  for  anyone  to  try  and  induce  the  trance.  He  claims  that 
hypnotism  is  something  he  never  liked,  that  he  thinks  the  whole  thing  silly  and 
does  not  wish  to  make  a  fool  of  himself.  If  we  press  him,  he  will  consent  very 
reluctantly  to  allow  someone  present  to  try,  but  the  operator  in  question  can  get 
nowhere.  The  subject  is  definitely  hostile  and  merely  goes  through  the  motions 
of  co-operation  but  nothing  more. 


Finally,  to  complete  this  curious  picture  we  use  the  posthypnotic  suggestion  to 
induce  hypnotism,  after  the  first  trance.  We  say  to  the  subject,  "Listen 
carefully.  In  future,  whenever  I  take  the  lobe  of  my  left  ear  in  my  left  hand  and 
pull  it  three  imes,  you  will  at  once  go  sound  asleep."  This  suggestion  may  have 
to  be  repeated  several  times,  depending  on  the  subject,  but  with  a  little  practice 
it  will  work.  To  hypnotize  the  patient,  the  operator  now  merely  strokes  his  left 
ear  three  times  and  the  subject  is  in  trance.  Needless  to  say,  we  may  use  any 
cue,  as  long  as  we  make  it  clear  to  the  subject  what  this  cue  is  to  be.  We  may 
say  to  him,  "You  are  asleep"  or  may  use  any  other  phrase  as  "Mary  had  a  little 
lamb,"  if  we  wish  it  to  be  verbal,  while  the  range  of  visual  cues  is  unlimited. 

The  resulting  picture  of  hypnotism  is  something  with  which  the  reader  will  be 
quite  unfamiliar.  We  will  see  later  that  hypnotism  has  nothing  to  do  with  sleep, 
a  good  subject  may  be  in  deepest  trance  yet  behave  for  all  the  world  as  if  he 
were  wide  awake.  For  example,  the  writer  has  used  a  somnambulist  as  his 
bridge  partner  for  an  evening,  had  the  subject  play  every  other  hand  in  the 
trance  state  and  no  one  in  the  room  was  any  the  wiser.  Control  of  the  trance 
was  exercised  by  means  of  posthypnotic  cues,  in  this  case  scratching  the  left  ear 
or  scratching  the  right  ear  to  hypnotize  or  awaken  the  subject. 

This  shift  from  waking  to  hypnotic  states  can  be  extremely  quick  and  subtle. 
The  writer  recently  saw  a  very  beautiful  demonstration.  Another  operator  was 
demonstrating  with  a  very  good  subject,  hypnotizing  and  awakening  him,  with 
the  writer  trying  to  detect  the  change.  It  turned  out  to  be  quite  impossible,  so 
well  concealed  were  the  cues  and  so  quickly  did  the  change  occur.  The  only 
way  the  writer  could  decide  was  to  ask  the  subject,  quite  frankly,  "Are  you 
asleep?"  and  take  his  word.  In  the  last  analysis  it  would  have  been  easy  to 
check  up  by  using  some  test,  such  as  anaesthesia,  but  under  the  circumstances 
this  was  not  necessary.  The  subject  was  quite  honest  and  enjoyed  the  game  as 
much  as  anyone.  This  certainly  is  a  very  different  picture  of  hypnotism  from 
that  which  exists  in  the  mind  of  the  average  layman.  It  is  this  very  confusing, 
one  might  almost  say,  deceptive  aspect  of  hypnotism  to  which  we  later  devote 
several  chapters. 

We  have  noted  the  main  points  of  interest  in  the  posthypnotic  suggestion. 
Anything  which  we  can  get  in  hypnotism  we  can  get  by  posthypnotic  means. 
We  pointed  out  the  weird  compulsive  power  which  these  delayed  suggestions 
have,  especially  when  the  subject  does  not  realize  the  cause  of  his  actions;  also 
that  the  subject  will  tend  to  rationalize,  to  give  reasons  for  his  actions.  These 
reasons  he  believes  just  as  much  as  if  they  were  genuine. 


Then  we  have  the  curious  fact  that  with  the  posthypnotic  suggestion  we  can 
remove  all  knowledge  of  ever  having  been  hypnotized  and  render  it  impossible 
for  anyone  but  the  operator  to  use  hypnotism  at  any  future  date.  Finally  we  can 
use  posthypnotic  cues  to  aid  in  hypnotizing  at  a  future  date.  These  can  be 
employed  so  cleverly  that  an  experienced  operator  cannot  detect  their  use, 
cannot  even  detect,  without  tests,  that  the  subject  is  in  the  trance. 

There  are  a  few  other  questions  which  seem  of  interest  to  the  public.  How  long 
will  the  posthypnotic  suggestion  last?  Frankly  we  have  no  idea.  Liebeault 
reports  a  case  in  which  a  very  complicated  suggestion  was  carried  out  after  a 
year.  The  writer  recently  ran  across  a  case  where  the  posthypnotic  suggestion 
seemed  to  be  fairly  strong  after  twenty  years. 

During  the  last  war  he  was  interested  in  the  study  of  hypnotism  and  was  far 
more  inclined  to  go  in  for  "stunts"  in  those  early  days.  He  had  a  favorite  trick 
with  one  subject.  He  would  say,  "Watch  the  front."  Whereupon  the  subject 
would  stand  up  and  shout,  "Call  out  the  guard.  Here  comes  Paul  Revere." 

It  happened  that  recently  the  operator  met  this  subject  and  in  the  course  of  the 
conversation  suddenly  said,  "Watch  the  front."  The  subject  looked  puzzled, 
then  said,  "Call  out  the  guard.  Paul  Revere  is  coming."  Then  he  immediately 
looked  even  more  puzzled  and  added,  "I  wonder  why  I  said  that.  Somehow 
something  you  said  recalls  the  last  war  and  all  the  muck  in  the  trenches.  I  never 
recalled  the  whole  thing  quite  so  vividly  before." 

work  after  a  day  at  the  office.  We  try  the  usual  hypnotic  suggestions  with 
considerable  success,  then  clinch  the  matter  with  some  very  specific 
suggestions  which  are  to  take  the  form  of  autosuggestion. 

We  say  to  him,  "In  the  evening  when  you  wish  to  concentrate,  you  will  prepare 
all  your  work  so  that  you  will  not  have  to  leave  your  room.  You  will  then  put 
your  watch  on  the  table,  take  a  card  and  print  on  it  'Concentrate  until  10:30.' 
You  will  place  this  card  beside  the  watch.  From  then  on  you  will  have  no 
difficulty  whatsoever  in  attending  to  your  work.  Everything  will  leave  your 
mind  except  the  determination  to  work  hard  until  10:30  or  whatever  time  you 
may  print  on  the  card."  This  little  trick  seems  to  help  very  much  in  securing  the 
much  desired  ability  to  concentrate. 

Here,  of  course,  arises  a  very  neat  point.  Is  this  actually  autosuggestion  or 
posthypnotic  suggestion?  In  this  book  we  will  side-step  the  issue  by  saying  that 
the  question  is  only  of  theoretical  interest.  We  could  argue  indefinitely  over 
many  such  problems,  as,  for  instance,  is  all  suggestion  autosuggestion  or  is  all 


suggestion  hetero-suggestion;  that  is,  suggestion  with  the  aid  of  an  operator, 
real  or  imagined?  The  reader  may  feel  he  has  the  answer  but  we  can  assure  him 
that  much  ink  has  been  shed  on  this  issue  and  it  is  still  an  open  question.  For 
our  purposes  we  are  entitled  to  avoid  such  problems  on  the  plea  that  we  simply 
go  "round  and  round  the  mulberry  bush."  If  the  professional  psychologist  can 
not  find  the  answer,  we  can  not  hope  to  do  so. 

As  with  the  hallucination,  we  can  obtain  all  other  hypnotic  phenomena  by 
means  of  autosuggestion  and  by  using  the  same  technique.  Paralyses, 
anaesthesias,  even  control  of  the  heart  rate  lend  themselves  to  this  attack.  But 
its  real  practical  use  would  be  in  giving  man  command  over  himself,  over  his 
powers  of  concentration,  and  over  his  personality,  so  that  he  could  rebuild 
himself  along  the  lines  of  success  and  happiness.  There  may  be  here  a  great 
future  for  autosuggestion. 

However,  all  autosuggestion  need  not  be  initiated  by  hypnotism.  Coue  was  not 
interested  in  this  approach  and  Baudouin  outlines  in  his  book  very  carefully  the 
ordinary  procedure.  This  is  literally  to  give  to  yourself,  when  relaxed,  the 
desired  suggestions.  Coue's  famous  formula,  "Every  day  and  in  every  way  I'm 
getting  better  and  better,"  was  quite  the  rage  a  few  years  ago.  Undoubtedly  such 
a  general  formula  can  be  of  great  help  in  many  cases. 

Coue  in  his  writings  on  autosuggestion  stresses  the  importance  of  imagination. 
If  we  can  imagine  a  thing  vividly  enough,  then  it's  true.  This  point  is  very  open 
to  argument.  We  must  realize  that  in  autosuggestion,  as  in  hypnotism,  people 
probably  vary  greatly  in  their  openness  to  such  suggestions.  Success  will  not  be 
uniform  with  any  technique,  some  people  will  get  results,  others  will  not. 

Nevertheless,  the  writer  has  found  that  the  following  procedure  seems  to  be  the 
one  which  is  easiest  and  which  can  produce  most  of  the  things  we  get  in 
hypnotism.  The  subject  should  relax  on  a  couch  or  in  a  chair,  close  his  eyes, 
and  "Talk  sleep"  to  himself.  With  a  little  practice  he  will  recognize  the  coming 
of  hypnosis,  that  "faraway"  feeling  accompanied  by  numbness  in  the  limbs  and 
a  general  laziness. 

When  this  stage  arrives  the  subject  should  then  shift  over  to  active  suggestion, 
but  without  awakening  himself.  He  must  suggest  to  himself  that,  let  us  say,  all 
sensation  has  gone  out  of  his  right  arm  or  that  he  is  listening  to  a  symphony. 
The  technique  of  autosuggestion  is  difficult,  but  it  can  be  mastered.  Once  the 
subject  has  obtained  this  mastery  he  will  find  that  not  only  can  he  produce,  say, 
hallucinations  in  the  trance  itself  but  can  actually  suggest  posthypnotic 
hallucinations  to  himself.  It  does  sound  weird  but  it  can  be  done. 


For  example,  the  writer  while  in  military  hospital  had  ample  time  to  experiment 
with  autosuggestion.  He  was  able  to  suggest  to  himself  that  he  would  wake  up 
at  2  A.M.  and  hear  a  symphony.  Even  more  interesting  he  could  suggest  that  he 
would  awaken  and  hear  spiritistic  raps.  Sure  enough  at  2  a.m.  he  was  wide 
awake  listening  to  very  distinct  raps  from  the  spirit  world.  Then  came  a  very 
interesting  experience,  almost  a  state  of  divided  consciousness.  He  heard  the 
raps  distinctly  but  knew  they  were  the  results  of  autosuggestion.  He  was  even 
able  to  make  a  "mental  request"  that  they  group  themselves  in  twos  and  threes 
and  the  spirits  obliged.  We  will  see  later  that  hypnotism  provides  us  with  a  key 
to  explain  most  psychic  phenomena,  when  these  are  genuine  and  not  the  result 
of  magician's  tricks.  Autosuggestion  gives  us  an  excellent  device  with  which  to 
study  many  strange  things.  The  writer  had  a  pet  polar  bear  which  he  was  able  to 
call  up  merely  by  counting  to  five.  This  animal  would  parade  around  the 
hospital  ward  in  most  convincing  fashion,  over  and  under  the  beds,  kiss  the 
nurses  and  bite  the  doctors.  It  was  very  curious  to  note  how  obedient  he  was  to 
"mental"  commands,  even  jumping  out  of  a  three  story  window  on  demand. 

But  there  is  a  certain  menace  to  autosuggestion  which  this  phantom  bear 
illustrated.  He  became  so  very  familiar  that  he  refused  to  go  away.  He  would 
turn  up  in  the  most  unexpected  places  and  without  being  sent  for.  The  writer 
was  playing  bridge  one  evening  and  almost  threw  his  hostess  into  hysterics  by 
suddenly  remarking,  "There's  that  damn  bear  again.  I  wish  someone  would 
shoot  the  beast."  He  also  had  a  nasty  habit  of  turning  up  in  dark  corners  at 
night,  all  very  well  when  one  realized  he  was  just  made  of  ghost- stuff  but  rather 
hard  on  one's  nerves  for  all  that.  So  he  was  banished  and  told  never  to  return, 
but  it  was  fully  a  month  before  the  writer  felt  quite  sure  that  his  ghostly  form 
would  not  be  grinning  at  him  over  the  foot  of  his  bed  during  a  thunderstorm. 

There  is  a  real  danger  here  in  connection  with  autosuggestion-a  much  greater 
menace  than  can  ever  arise  from  straight  hypnotism.  In  the  latter,  the  situation 
is  always  in  skilled  hands.  Any  bad  effects  can  be  remedied  on  the  spot  once 
and  for  all,  but  this  is  not  so  with  autosuggestion.  The  subject  is  his  own  doc 
tor,  which  has  all  the  dangers  this  would  imply  if  he  were  allowed  the  run  of  a 
drugstore  to  treat  his  ills  without  previous  training.  It  is  very  hard  for  the 
average  man  himself  to  recognize  trouble  which  may  be  the  result  of 
autosuggestion  and  just  as  difficult  for  him  to  treat  it. 

The  writer  recalls  the  case  of  a  very  gifted  lady  who  became  interested  in 
spiritism.  As  we  will  see,  the  spiritistic  phenomena  are  largely  due  to 
autosuggestion.  She  became  so  completely  deranged  through  talking  to  the 
spirits-St.  Augustine  in  this  case-that  she  had  to  retire  to  a  sanatarium.  She  has 
since  regained  a  certain  amount  of  her  former  mental  balance  but,  left  to 


herself,  she  could  never  have  handled  the  situation.  This  was  largely  because 
she  did  not  realize  how  very  near  she  was  to  complete  insanity.  St.  Augustine 
was  a  very  real  person,  she  valued  his  friendship  immensely  and  resisted 
treatment  until  the  supposed  spirit  was  ousted  by  hypnotism.  With  this  aid  she 
recovered  sanity  enough  to  see  how  serious  her  situation  was  and  from  then  on 
could  help  herself. 

The  writer  cannot  become  very  enthusiastic  about  autosuggestion.  We  will  see 
in  later  pages  that  it  may  easily  result  in  dissociation.  In  theory  the  subject 
should  be  able  to  guide  his  own  treatment  and  become  the  master  of  his  own 
personality.  But  it  may  just  as  readily  encourage  a  tendency  to  dissociation 
which  is  latent  in  so  many  people,  and  with  this  lead  to  the  development  of 
neurotic  traits  which  are  far  from  desirable.  The  reader  will  do  well  to  read 
through  the  next  two  chapters  before  he  passes  judgment  on  this  statement.  As 
yet  we  have  not  talked  enough  on  the  theory  of  hypnotism  to  give  us  a  proper 
basis  for  discussion. 

Anything  which  occurs  in  hypnotism  or  the  posthypnotic  suggestion  we  can  get 
in  autosuggestion.  Finally  any  of  these  hypnotic  phenomena  may  occur  in 
everyday  life,  when  we  refer  to  the  individual  as  "queer,"  an  hysteric,  a 
neurotic,  even  as  insane.  For  this  reason  hypnotism  is  of  very  great  importance, 
and  we  refer  to  it  as  the  "laboratory"  of  abnormal  psychology.  It  provides  us 
with  a  key  whereby  we  can  understand  the  insane,  and  the  neurotic. 

For  instance,  the  operator  can  suggest  to  a  subject  that,  on  awakening,  he  will 
have  an  irresistible  impulse  to  kill  every  cat  he  sees,  telling  him  in  hypnotism 
that  cats  spread  bubonic  plague  through  their  fleas  and  that  by  killing  cats  he 
will  confer  a  great  service  on  humanity.  When  the  subject  awakens  he  may  very 
easily  have  an  urge  to  kill  any  cat  he  meets.  Asked  for  a  reason  he  will  insist 
that  they  are  a  menace  to  the  country,  that  they  spread  the  plague.  Yet  he  will 
have  no  idea  of  where  this  idea  comes  from. 

Should  we  run  across  such  a  case  in  everyday  life  we  would  say  that  he  is 
suffering  from  a  "compulsion."  Actually  we  do  have  many  examples  of  these 
compulsions  as  in  the  case  of  the  kleptomaniac  who  must  steal  even  worthless 
objects,  the  pyromaniac  who  must  set  fires,  and  many  others.  Moreover,  we 
will  point  out  in  later  pages  that  the  kleptomaniac,  and  the  pyromaniac  are 
really  working  under  a  posthypnotic  suggestion  -minus  the  hypnotist.  They  act 
in  exactly  the  same  way  as  if  they  had  been  hypnotized  and  given  their 
instructions  in  the  trance.  As  a  matter  of  fact  we  will  see  that  they  have  been 
hypnotized  at  some  time  in  their  life  and  have  been  given  the  suggestion  in 
question.  The  fact  that  no  hypnotist  was  involved,  that  they  may  never  have 


seen  a  hypnotist  in  all  their  life,  we  will  see,  has  no  bearing  whatsoever  on  the 
case. 

Similarly  hypnotism  gives  us  the  explanation  for  many  other  types  of  mental 
disorder.  The  man  who  has  a  fear  of  cats,  a  phobia  as  it  is  called,  acts  exactly  as 
if  he  had  received  the  suggestion  in  hypnotism.  And  he  did-only  it  was  not 
labelled  hypnotism.  Likewise  we  will  point  out  that  an  understanding  of 
hypnotism  helps  us  to  understand  "Napoleon"  in  your  nearest  state  hospital  for 
mental  diseases.  We  can  procure  him  in  any  psychological  laboratory,  and  in  so 
doing  understand  how  he  "gets  that  way"  in  normal  life.  As  a  matter  of  fact,  the 
writer  can  see  no  difference  between  the  Freudian  complex  and  the 
posthypnotic  suggestion.  We  will  be  in  a  better  position  to  understand  that 
statement  after  the  next  two  chapters,  but  we  would  like  to  re-emphasize  the 
thread  of  continuity.  Hypnotism,  posthypnotic  suggestion,  autosuggestion;  what 
we  get  in  one  we  can  get  in  the  other.  And  the  phenomena  we  obtain  in  any  of 
them  occur  in  everyday  life,  when  we  refer  to  them  as  various  mental  disorders. 
But  actually  we  can  best  understand  them  as  forms  of  the  posthypnotic 
suggestion  or  autosuggestion.  This  is  why  our  subject  is  so  very  important. 

Just  a  final  word.  Hypnotism  may  explain  many  forms  of  insanity.  That  does 
not  mean  to  say  that  hypnotism  can  cure  them.  In  some  cases  it  may  help,  but 
the  fact  is  that,  while  we  may  know  why  Mr.  Smith  is  in  hospital  and  thinks  he 
is  Napoleon,  this  does  not  guarantee  a  cure  by  hypnotism  or  any  other  means. 

Chapter  4 

SOME  CURIOUS  STATES  IN  EVERYDAY  LIFE  WHICH  ARE  DUE 
TO  HYPNOTISM 

LET  us  now  examine  some  of  those  states  which  are  closely  related  to 
hypnotism,  for  in  so  doing  we  will  not  only  understand  the  underlying  cause  of 
these  related  phenomena  but  will  obtain  a  fuller  picture  of  hypnotism  itself. 
Take,  for  instance,  automatic  writing  as  a  first  example.  The  reader  is  probably 
familiar  with  this  curious  state,  wherein  the  subject's  hand  writes 
"automatically"  with  no  reference  to  what  is  in  the  conscious  mind. 

This  may  take  many  forms.  The  subject  may  lose  consciousness  completely 
while  the  hand  writes,  but  in  general  he  retains  his  full  conscious  faculties.  He 
may  be  able  to  interrupt  the  hand  but  again  the  writing  hand  is  generally  a  law 
unto  itself.  It  scribbles  along  until  it  has  finished,  perhaps  in  five  minutes, 
perhaps  in  fifty,  then  stops  and  is  again  a  part  of  the  normal  body  pattern.  The 
usual  picture  is  somewhat  as  follows.  The  subject  relaxes  in  a  chair  with  a 


pencil  in  his  hand,  a  paper  on  the  desk.  After  one  or  two  minutes  the  hand 
makes  a  few  convulsive  movements,  then  starts  writing.  The  letters  are 
generally  large  and  ill-formed,  but  in  some  cases  as  in  that  of  Stainton  Moses 
the  writing  may  be  beautiful.  The  hand  guides  itself  largely  by  touch  and  writes 
until  it  comes  to  the  end  of  the  page,  then  pauses  with  pencil  uplifted  awaiting  a 
fresh  sheet  of  paper.  The  subject  himself  may  supply  this  with  his  other  hand, 
or,  if  in  trance,  his  associate  will  put  the  fresh  sheets  in  place. 

The  strange  thing  about  this  whole  procedure  is  that  the  subject  has  no  control 
over  the  hand  in  question.  He  has  not  the  slightest  idea  as  to  what  it  will  next 
write  and  is  often  badly  embarrassed  when  the  hand  makes  a  "remark,"  so  to 
speak,  which  should  not  occur  in  polite  society.  We  can  screen  the  writing  hand 
from  the  subject's  sight,  passing  it  through  a  cloth  curtain.  Then  the  subject  can 
quietly  read  a  magazine  while  we  experiment  with  the  hand.  It  will  write  along, 
in  no  way  disturbing  the  subject  and  in  no  way  disturbed  by  what  he  may  be 
reading  or  thinking. 

We  stick  a  pin  in  the  hand,  but  the  subject  does  not  pay  the  least  attention.  But 
the  hand  promptly  writes  "stop  it,"  "cut  it  out,"  or  some  such  phrase.  The  writer 
had  an  ex-army  friend  on  whom  he  tried  this  little  trick.  Everything  was  going 
along  in  fine  fashion  until  we  pricked  the  hand  with  a  needle,  whereupon  the 
hand  burst  into  a  stream  of  cuss  words  that  would  have  made  any  regimental 
sergeant-major  blush  with  shame.  For  full  five  minutes  it  told  the  operator  just 
where  he  could  go  and  how  to  get  there.  All  this  time  the  subject  was  reading 
Oil  for  the  Lamps  of  China  without  the  slightest  idea  that  his  good  right  arm 
was  fighting  a  private  war. 

We  refer  to  automatic  writing  as  an  example  of  dissociation.  The  arm  in 
question  is  dissociated,  is  cut  off  from  the  rest  of  the  body.  This  must  mean  that 
those  parts  of  the  brain  which  control  the  arm  are  for  the  time  being 
disconnected  with  those  parts  responsible  for  normal  waking  consciousness, 
which  could  be  explained  in  terms  of  the  synapse  theory  we  have  already 
mentioned.  At  any  rate,  the  arm  acts  by  itself  and  seems  to  be  an  outlet  by 
which  the  unconscious  mind  can  express  itself  without  completely  unseating 
the  conscious  mind.  Certain  we  are  that  this  hand  will  often  mention  facts 
which  are  quite  unknown  to  the  subject. 

This  often  has  great  use  in  medicine.  We  take  a  subject,  aged  twenty-five,  who 
is  a  victim  of  the  hand-washing  mania;  he  simply  must  wash  his  hands  forty 
times  a  day.  He  also  does  automatic  writing,  and  as  we  can  get  no  real 
information  from  him  which  might  explain  his  compulsion  to  hand  washing,  we 
ask  the  hand  itself  in  automatic  writing. 


"Why  do  you  have  this  compulsion  to  wash?"  "I  don't  know." 

"Now,  think.  When  did  it  first  make  its  appearance?"  "Sometime  when  I  was 
about  eleven  or  twelve." 

"That  is  not  close  enough.  You  can  do  a  lot  better.  Now,  think.  When?  When 
and  why?" 

"Good  heavens.  Now  I  know,"  and  the  hand  scribbles  out  the  story. 

It  appears  that,  as  a  boy,  he  had  a  dog  of  which  he  was  very  fond.  On  one 
occasion  this  dug  fell  into  an  open  cesspool,  and  was  in  danger  of  drowning. 
The  boy  had  a  friend  hold  his  legs,  then  reached  down  and  rescued  the  dog, 
getting  himself  filthy  in  the  process.  Worse  than  this  he  also  collected  a  sound 
thrashing  from  his  father,  who  told  him  that  he  had  probably  contracted  various 
diseases,  including  syphilis.  On  this  basis  was  built  up  the  morbid  compulsion 
to  wash  his  hands.  We  will  see  later  that  the  most  important  step  in  curing 
many  such  conditions  is  that  of  learning  the  original  cause. 

We  can  find  examples  of  these  automatic  movements  in  much  simpler  form 
than  those  involved  in  automatic  writing.  Most  of  the  readers  have  probably 
been  present  at  a  "table  tilting  seance,"  wherein  the  table  is  in  contact  with  the 
spirit  world  and  raps  out  its  messages  to  friends  on  this  side  of  the  border. 
Science  now  generally  concedes  that  the  movements  of  the  table  are  due  to 
automatic-and  quite  unintentional-pushes  and  pulls  on  the  part  of  the  "sitter." 
The  fact  that  these  always  protest  that  they  have  exerted  no  conscious  effort 
means  nothing,  for  we  get  these  automatic  movements  in  far  more  elaborate 
form  with  automatic  writing  and  here  the  subject  may  be  totally  ignorant  of 
what  his  hand  is  doing.  Moreover,  the  plea  that  the  table  sometimes  raps  out 
information  of  which  no  one  present  is  conscious  also  means  nothing.  These 
automatic  movements,  as  coming  from  the  unconscious,  would  have  much 
material  at  their  disposal  of  which  the  normal  mind  would  be  in  ignorance.  It  is 
difficult  for  the  average  reader  to  grasp  this  possibility,  but  we  will  refer  him  to 
the  cases  of  multiple  personality  which  we  discuss  in  later  pages  of  this  chapter. 
This  weird  condition  probably  gives  the  most  convincing  illustrations  which 
psychology  can  muster. 

In  this  same  class,  of  course,  comes  work  with  the  ouija  board,  an  instrument 
with  which  we  are  all  familiar.  Here  the  automatic  and  wholly  unconscious 
movements  of  the  sitter  guide  the  little  table  over  the  board  as  it  spells  out 
answers  to  the  various  questions.  It  is  interesting  to  note  here  that  some  people 
can  work  the  ouija  board  with  great  success  obtaining  from  it  all  kinds  of 
information  of  which  they  have  no  knowledge.  It  comes  from  the  unconscious. 
Others  can  get  nothing  at  all  from  the  board.  It  simply  refuses  to  budge.  This  is 


in  strict  accord  with  what  we  would  expect  if  susceptibility  to  these  automatic 
movements  had  anything  to  do  with  a  similar  openness  to  hypnotic  suggestion. 

And  it  has,  very  definitely.  The  writer,  in  his  experience,  has  met  many  people 
who,  as  a  pastime,  practiced  automatic  writing.  Whenever  he  has  tried 
hypnotism  with  these  people,  they  always  turned  out  to  be  excellent  subjects. 
And  we  find  the  same  with  people  who  can  get  good  results  from  the  ouija 
board.  As  a  matter  of  fact  an  experienced  operator  has  to  waste  very  little  time 
looking  for  subjects.  A  little  inquiry  will  show  that  in  any  group  there  are 
people  who  consistently  walk  or  talk  in  their  sleep,  who  have  practiced 
automatic  writing,  who  like  to  work  with  the  ouija  board  or  who  have  success 
as  "crystal  gazers."  With  such  people  the  operator  can  proceed  under  the  almost 
certain  assumption  that  he  is  dealing  with  good  hypnotic  subjects. 

He  is  dealing  with  a  person  who  is  highly  suggestible  and  it  would  appear  that 
most  of  these  automatic  movements,  so  often  associated  with  spiritism  are 
largely  the  result  of  autosuggestion.  The  subject  becomes  interested  in 
spiritism,  and  has  an  intense  desire  to  get  some  of  the  "mediumistic" 
phenomena  in  himself.  So  he  seats  himself  in  front  of  paper,  with  a  pencil  in  his 
hand,  relaxes  and  hopes  for  results.  This  is  simply  one  form  of  autosuggestion 
and  if  the  individual  is  a  good  hypnotic  subject,  he  gets  the  results  he  wishes.  If 
not,  he  becomes  discouraged  and  concludes  that  the  whole  thing  is  a  fraud.  But 
there  is  nothing  supernatural  or  supernormal  about  automatic  writing  or  the 
ouija  board. 

The  results  depend  on  dissociation  produced  by  suggestion.  We  will  see  later 
that  while  dissociation  may  not  be  the  whole  explanation  of  hypnotism,  the  fact 
remains  that  we  almost  never  get  hypnotism  without  dissociation.  They  are 
psychological  Siamese  twins  born  of  the  same  parent,  suggestion,  and  both 
dependent  on  the  suggestibility  of  the  individual  in  question.  That  analogy  is 
not  quite  correct,  but  it  gives  a  pretty  good  picture  for  all  that. 

Then  again  we  see  the  relationship  between  these  states  and  hypnotism  in  the 
fact  that  we  can  easily  obtain  them  in  most  good  hypnotic  subjects  by  means  of 
suggestion  in  the  trance.  We  make  use  of  the  posthypnotic  suggestion,  saying  to 
the  subject,  "In  the  future  whenever  you  wish  to  do  automatic  writing,  you  will 
sit  down  before  a  sheet  of  blank  paper,  take  a  pencil  in  your  hand,  and  relax. 
You  will  then  recite  the  first  five  letters  of  the  alphabet  at  the  end  of  which  your 
hand  will  begin  to  write."  It  may  be  necessary  to  repeat  these  suggestions  in 
following  seances,  even  to  give  some  very  specific  suggestion  as  "your  hand 
will  write  'Mary  had  a  little  lamb'"  just  by  way  of  getting  the  subject  into  the 
knack  of  the  thing.  But  with  persistence  the  somnambulist  can  generally 


succeed  with  automatic  writing  while  the  automatic  writer  will  almost  always 
become  a  somnambulist. 


Another  curious  phenomenon  we  see  in  everyday  life  is  "crystal  gazing."  Here 
again  the  unconscious  seems  near  the  surface  and  in  this  case  vision  is  used  as 
the  outlet.  Also  it  can  be  obtained  as  a  result  of  posthypnotic  suggestion  and 
very  probably  most  crystal  gazers  are  good  hypnotic  subjects.  The  writer  has 
had  too  little  experience  here  to  say  but  feels  certain  that  such  is  the  case.  By 
the  way,  we  do  not  need  a  crystal  for  crystal  gazing.  A  glass  of  water  is  just  as 
good  especially  if  we  have  a  point  of  concentration  on  the  surface,  such  as  a 
small  drop  of  oil.  Even  this  is  unnecessary.  And  the  technique  for  developing 
the  "power"  is  exactly  the  same  as  is  that  in  the  case  of  automatic  writing.  Sit 
down,  relax,  gaze  into  the  water,  and  hope  for  results,  all  of  which  is  a  perfect 
setting  for  autosuggestion.  The  process  can  be  made  much  shorter  by  using  the 
posthypnotic  suggestion,  showing  again  the  close  tie-up  between  the  hypnotic 
states  and  these  odd  conditions  of  everyday  life.  Moreover,  the  "visions"  we  get 
in  crystal  gazing  are  the  same  as  the  revelations  through  automatic  writing. 
Material  drawn  from  the  unconscious  mind,  sometimes  dealing  with  events  of 
which  the  subject  has  no  conscious  knowledge.  The  reservoir  is  the  same  but 
the  "pipe  line"  leads  in  different  directions.  In  automatic  writing  to  the  hand,  in 
crystal  gazing  to  the  eyes,  but  nothing  supernatural  in  either  case.  A  very 
excellent  and  authoritative  book  on  this  subject  is  that  by  T.  Besterman. 

All  these  conditions  illustrate  a  very  important  principle  of  which  we  will  later 
deal  at  greater  length.  Certain  experiences  of  childhood  and  later  life  are 
"repressed,"  are  forced  out  of  consciousness  because  of  the  fact  that  they  are 
very  unpleasant.  These  are  completely  forgotten  so  far  as  our  everyday  life  is 
concerned,  but  while  "down"  they  are  not  "out."  As  a  matter  of  fact,  they  may 
cause  a  great  deal  of  trouble,  being  the  origin  of  all  sorts  of  mental  disorders. 

"Shell  shock"  is  a  case  in  point.  It  really  should  be  called  "war  neurosis"  since 
it  has  nothing  to  do  with  shells  necessarily,  but  is  a  reaction  to  fear.  In  general, 
it  will  be  found  that  these  shell  shock  cases  have  a  period  of  amnesia,  a 
memory  blank,  for  some  very  terrible  experience.  They  remember  nothing 
about  it,  yet  for  purposes  of  a  cure  it  is  necessary  that  it  be  restored  to 
consciousness.  Hypnotism  is  excellent,  or  any  other  trick,  which  taps  the 
unconscious,  including  crystal  gazing. 

The  writer  recalls  one  such  case  in  the  last  war.  The  patient  was  suffering  from 
a  violent  tremor  all  over  his  body,  so  violent  that  he  could  not  walk  or  even 
feed  himself.  The  doctor,  thinking  that  he  would  try  hypnotism,  began 
explaining  to  the  subject  just  what  he  would  want.  In  the  course  of  the 


conversation  the  subject  volunteered  the  information  that  he  had  once  been 
very  much  interested  in  crystal  gazing  and  had  been  quite  successful  in 
obtaining  visions.  This  seemed  a  good  lead  so  the  doctor  proposed  he  try  it  and 
report  his  experiences. 

The  patient  did  so,  and  saw  in  the  glass  the  whole  terrible  experience  of  a 
bombing  attack  in  which  most  of  his  company  had  been  killed  and  he  himself 
had  bombed  three  of  the  enemy  in  a  dugout  under  very  harrowing 
circumstances.  Yet  previous  to  this  vision  he  would  not  recall  any  details  of  the 
attack,  his  mind  being  a  complete  blank  for  a  period  of  roughly  twentyfour 
hours. 

Another  type  of  automatic  activity  which  is  not  so  generally  known  but  which 
further  illustrates  our  point  is  the  phenomenon  of  "shell  hearing."  We  are  all 
familiar  with  the  fact  that  if  we  cover  an  ear  with  a  shell  we  get  a  peculiar 
confused  roaring.  In  some  people  this  roaring  refines  itself  into  voices  and 
these  become  a  series  of  auditory  hallucinations.  Moreover,  we  do  not  need  the 
classic  shell.  A  tea  cup  held  over  the  ear  does  just  as  well  and  as  usual  the 
voices  heard  tell  of  events  with  which  the  subject  is  already  familiar  or  which 
are  in  his  unconscious  mind. 

Both  automatic  writing  and  shell  hearing  naturally  lend  themselves  to  another 
line  of  activity.  The  writer  or  listener  is  able  to  express  his  own  philosophy  of 
life  in  such  a  way  that  he  may  easily  rank  himself  as  a  prophet.  For  some 
strange  reason  the  average  man  is  very  much  impressed  with  these  automatic 
phenomena  both  in  others  and  in  himself.  Consequently  if  he  has  a  vision, 
receives  a  message  by  automatic  writing  or  hears  "voices"  with  or  without  the 
"shell,"  he  is  very  liable  to  regard  them  as  direct  from  the  supernatural  and  act 
as  if  he  were  receiving  guidance  from  the  deity. 

All  the  aspects  of  automatic  phenomena  are  summed  up  best  in  our  final 
example,  automatic  speech,  speaking  with  tongues  or  glossolalia.  The  best 
book  on  the  subject  is  that  by  G.  B.  Cutten.  We  are  all  familiar  with  the  Bible 
story  of  Pentecost  day,  when  the  tongues  of  fire  descended  on  the  disciples' 
heads  and  they  began  talking  in  "tongues."  Whether  or  not  this  original 
experience  involved  actual  foreign  languages  in  which  they  were  to  preach  the 
reader  may  judge  for  himself.  Suffice  it  for  our  purposes  to  say  that  fifty  years 
later,  in  the  days  of  St.  Paul,  the  "gift  of  tongues"  was  understood  by  no  one.  St. 
Paul  himself  advises  his  followers  to  expend  their  energies  along  other  lines 
since  no  person  can  understand  what  they  are  talking  about.  Since  his  time 
there  has  not  been  a  case,  acceptable  to  psychology,  wherein  an  individual  has 
been  able  to  speak  any  language  without  first  going  through  the  process  of 


learning  the  same.  To  be  sure,  we  have  heard  of  many  such  cases  in  popular 
literature,  even  have  certain  religious  groups  who  insist  that  their  members  talk 
all  sorts  of  foreign  languages  with  no  previous  training,  but  the  psychologist 
would  still  say  "unproven." 

What  happens  here  is  exactly  the  same  sort  of  thing  we  have  already  seen  in 
automatic  writing.  A  case  of  dissociation,  only  here  it  is  the  muscles  of  the 
throat  which  are  no  longer  under  control  of  the  normal  waking  personality.  The 
individual  starts  talking  just  as  the  automatic  writer  writes,  the  throat  muscles 
appearing,  to  run  themselves  without  any  conscious  control  from  the  person  in 
question.  The  words  the  subject  utters  may  be  utterly  unintelligible,  a  language 
of  his  own,  a  "divine  language"  as  it  is  sometimes  called  or  he  may  speak  his 
own  native  tongue,  expressing  what  is  in  the  unconscious  mind.  In  this  latter 
case  we  again  have  an  analogy  from  automatic  writing.  The  thoughts  expressed 
may  be  utterly  trivial,  even  foolish,  or  they  may  represent  the  working  of  a 
profound,  even  artistic  mind.  It  might  be  well  here  to  introduce  a  case  which 
achieved  considerable  fame  a  few  years  back,  fame  which  was  justly  earned,  to 
illustrate  some  points. 

We  refer  to  the  case  of  Patience  Worth.  Here  we  have  a  lady,  Mrs.  Curran  in 
everyday  life,  who  lived  the  healthy  normal  existence  of  millions  of  other 
American  women.  She  had  a  high  school  education,  had  early  hoped  to  become 
a  singer  or  an  artist  of  some  description  and  again,  like  millions  of  others,  had 
been  forced  to  realize  that  she  simply  did  not  have  the  ability.  Fortunately  she 
had  the  good  sense  to  accept  this  fact,  a  point  of  view  which  all  too  many 
humans  never  will  realize. 

But,  strange  to  say,  Mrs.  Curran  ended  up  as  an  artist,  one  of  the  best;  yet  not 
Mrs.  Curran,  but  the  unconscious  of  Mrs.  Curran,  Patience  Worth.  This  curious 
situation  illustrates  very  nicely  how  these  automatic  phenomena  merge  into  one 
another  just  as  do  the  various  stages  of  hypnotism.  Table  tilting  and  the  ouija 
board  are  more  or  less  crude  manifestations  of  the  unconscious  at  work,  an 
outcropping  which  is  not  too  convincing  and  is  purely  temporary,  but  in  the 
case  of  Patience  Worth  the  unconscious  has  assumed  the  role  of  a  separate  and 
distinct  personality,  one  which  is  in  some  respects  far  superior  in  ability  to  the 
original.  Here  we  are  verging  on  multiple  personality,  which  we  will  discuss 
very  shortly. 

This  organized  unconscious  of  Mrs.  Curran  gave  itself  the  name  of  Patience 
Worth  and  claimed  to  be  the  spirit  of  an  English  girl  who  had  lived  in  the  reign 
of  Queen  Elizabeth,  during  the  latter  half  of  the  sixteenth  century.  Moreover, 
while  Mrs.  Curran  had  no  particular  artistic  ability,  Patience  Worth  was  an 


author  of  the  highest  grade,  writing  several  books  and  publishing  many  poems 
which  are  admitted  good  by  our  best  critics.  And,  strange  as  it  may  seem,  these 
books  contain  a  much  higher  percentage  of  sixteenth  century  English  than 
almost  any  other  novel  or  poem  written  in  America!  If  the  reader  wishes  a 
thorough  and  scientific  discussion  of  this  case  we  refer  him  to  the  book,  The 
Case  o  f  Patience  Worth,  by  W.  F.  Prince. 

While  science  will  not  accept  the  claim  that  a  spirit  from  past  years  occupies 
the  body  of  Mrs.  Curran,  science  will  admit  that  the  case  is  very  complex, 
showing  to  a  very  high  degree  that  ingenuity  of  the  unconscious  so  evident  in 
hypnotism.  This  unconscious,  having  assumed  the  title  Patience  Worth,  has 
been  remarkably  consistent,  as  shown  by  the  fact  that  she  always  uses  a 
preponderance  of  old  English  words  in  all  her  writings.  We  leave  the  reader  the 
task  of  reviewing  the  evidence  and  deciding  for  himself  whether  or  not  she  has 
proved  her  point. 

This  particular  case  illustrates  another  very  interesting  phase  of  automatic 
activity.  With  practice  it  sometimes  becomes  far  more  efficient,  the 
unconscious  itself  becoming  better  organized.  Patience  Worth  began  her 
communications  with  the  planchette,  a  crude  form  of  ouija  board.  But  this  was 
a  very  slow  and  clumsy  method  for  such  a  brilliant  personality  so  she 
"graduated"  to  automatic  writing.  Even  this  proved  too  tedious  so  she  now  does 
her  work  by  automatic  speech.  Moreover,  she  has  the  most  remarkable  control 
over  this  speech.  She,  Mrs.  Curran,  sits  down  and  relaxes.  Immediately 
Patience  Worth  comes  to  the  surface  and  begins  work  on  her  latest  novel  or 
book  of  poems,  Mrs.  Curran  being  conscious  all  the  time  and  literally  attending 
to  her  knitting.  Should  the  phone  ring  Mrs.  Curran  immediately  answers  it, 
takes  over  control  of  her  throat  and  talks  as  Mrs.  Curran.  A  minute  later 
Patience  Worth  is  dictating  her  book!  This  evidence  of  unconscious  ability  is 
by  no  means  as  rare  as  many  of  the  readers  may  think.  We  find  it  in  many  spirit 
mediums,  a  group  whom  we  discuss  later  in  this  chapter.  And,  as  would 
naturally  be  expected,  we  find  it  in  certain  hypnotic  subjects  when  we  take  the 
trouble  to  look,  sometimes  the  evidence  of  artistic  ability  approaching  genius. 
After  all,  that  is  not  so  unreasonable  as  it  may  sound.  We  have  repeatedly  said 
that  the  subject  in  hypnotism  is  not  "asleep."  He  is  very  much  awake,  but  a 
different  personality.  We  know  that  a  great  deal  of  genius  in  humanity  is  held 
down  by  social  pressure;  the  individual  does  not  dare  give  vent  to  his  artistic 
talents  for  fear  of  making  a  fool  of  himself.  But  we  also  know  that  hypnotism 
may  lift  these  "inhibitions,"  as  we  term  them,  in  some  cases  freeing  the  subject 
in  the  sense  that  he  cares  very  little  for  the  opinions  of  his  social  group.  Under 
these  circumstances  genius,  if  it  exists,  might  have  the  chance  of  pushing  to  the 


fore.  For  instance,  Coleridge  claimed  to  have  written  Kubla  Khan  during  his 
sleep,  which  was  very  probably  a  state  of  unconscious  activity. 

As  we  mentioned  before,  these  automatic  phenomena  tend  to  merge  into  one 
another.  Patience  Worth,  as  the  unconscious  of  Mrs.  Curran,  is  so  well 
organized  that  we  may  regard  her  as  a  separate  personality,  which  brings  us  to 
the  most  curious  of  all  these  automatic,  these  semi-hypnotic  conditions,  that  of 
multiple  personality. 

And  with  this  field  of  multiple  personality  we  find  a  gradual  increase  in 
complexity.  The  most  simple  cases  we  refer  to  as  the  fugue  or  flight.  William 
James,  reported  on  such  cases,  among  the  earliest  in  the  literature.  A  man 
named  Ansel  Bourne  lived  in  Boston.  Suddenly  he  vanished  and  after  careful 
search  was  given  up  as  lost.  Six  months  later  a  man  in  Philadelphia,  who  had 
been  running  a  grocery  store  suddenly  "woke  up,"  gave  his  name  as  Ansel 
Bourne  and  asked  to  know  what  he  was  doing  so  far  away  from  home. 
Apparently  he  had  run  his  grocery  business  fairly  well  for  six  months  while  in 
this  "unconscious"  condition,  his  "secondary"  personality  taking  charge  and 
giving  the  appearance  of  normalcy.  Such  a  case  is  very  simple.  From  here  we 
can  go  to  the  type  of  case  represented  by  Rou.  Here  the  reader  will  see  the  very 
close  resemblance  between  this  particular  type  and  somnambulism  as  seen  in 
sleep  walking.  We  have  already  pointed  out  the  very  close  relationship  between 
somnambulism  and  hypnotism.  Rou  was  a  poor  boy  of  Paris,  France,  who  lived 
with  his  mother,  a  small  storekeeper.  But  Rou  was  in  the  habit  of  frequenting 
saloons  where  he  was  fascinated  by  the  tales  of  sailors. 

He  longed  to  become  a  sailor  himself  and  escape  from  his  uninteresting  world. 
Then  something  very  curious  began  to  happen.  He  would  suddenly  lose 
consciousness  and  start  for  the  seacoast,  doing  all  sorts  of  odd  jobs  to  keep 
himself  alive  and  fit.  His  unconscious  had  taken  over  control  and  decided  to 
become  a  sailor.  Then  at  the  end  of  a  day,  a  week,  or  a  month,  he  would 
suddenly  come  to  himself  or  "wake  up"  without  the  slightest  knowledge  of 
where  he  was  or  how  he  got  there.  He  would  be  sent  back  to  Paris  and  would  be 
quite  normal  for  a  period,  then  once  again  he  would  have  a  fugue,  would  walk 
in  his  sleep,  and  start  out  for  the  coast.  This  case  we  will  see  is  more  complex 
than  that  of  Ansel  Bourne  in  that  the  subject  had  recurrent  attacks. 

We  could  devote  many  pages  to  other  cases  by  way  of  showing  their  growing 
complexity  but  will  proceed  at  once  to  a  very  interesting  and  complex  example, 
which  was  carefully  studied  by  Professor  Morton  Prince  of  Harvard.  We  refer 
to  the  famous  Beauchamp  case  of  multiple  personality. 


Miss  Beauchamp  was  a  young  lady,  a  nurse  in  training  at  a  Boston  Hospital, 
when  Dr.  Prince  was  called  in  to  take  over  the  case  because  of  very  peculiar 
actions  on  the  part  of  the  lady  in  question.  After  long  and  careful  study  he  made 
a  very  interesting  discovery.  Her  body  contained  no  less  than  four  distinct 
personalities.  When  he  first  met  her  she  was  under  the  control  of  the  personality 
he  later  called  Bl,  or  the  Angel.  As  such,  she  was  a  very  sickly,  nervous,  highly 
religious,  overconscientious  type,  easily  tired  and  always  worrying  over  the 
sins  of  humanity  and  her  own  lost  state. 

Then  he  made  a  further  discovery..  Another  personality  made  its  appearance, 
Bill,  Sally,  or  the  Imp.  Sally  was  a  totally  different  proposition.  She  was  a  girl 
of  eight  or  nine,  absolutely  irresponsible,  with  tireless  energy  and  apparently  no 
conscience  whatsoever.  Sally  was  always  present  but  generally  as  an 
unconscious  personality,  "squeezed"  by  the  Angel,  as  she  said.  She  knew 
everything  that  was  going  on  and  thoroughly  hated  the  other  personality  which 
insisted  on  taking  the  body  to  church,  or  keeping  it  quietly  in  its  room  while 
she,  Sally,  could  think  of  far  more  interesting  things  to  do.  This  was  because 
Sally  could  not  generally  get  control  of  the  body  but  as  the  condition  became 
worse,  as  the  dissociation  became  more  marked,  Sally  found  it  easier  and  easier 
to  take  over  charge  and  then,  ah  then,  she  had  a  delicious  revenge. 

The  Angel  loathed  even  the  appearance  of  sin.  Sally  was  not  by  any  means  so 
conscientious.  One  of  her  delights  was  to  take  the  body  out  on  a  wild  "party" 
including  beer  and  young  men.  Then  to  suddenly  withdraw,  leave  the  body  to 
the  Angel  and  watch  her  squirm  as  she  got  herself  back  to  the  hospital.  This 
case  occurred  in  the  early  1900's,  when  the  morals  of  the  country  would  make 
such  a  situation  even  worse  than  today. 

Then  again,  Sally  was  tireless,  the  Angel  fatigued  very  easily.  Sally  could  go 
for  a  five  mile  walk  and  end  fresh  as  a  daisy.  Five  hundred  yards  would  leave 
the  Angel  exhausted,  so  Sally  would  get  control  of  the  body,  take  it  on  a 
particularly  long  walk  and  then  withdraw,  enjoying  the  tortures  which  the 
Angel  suffered  in  getting  herself  back  home  again. 

The  Angel  also  prided  herself  on  being  very  neat,  both  as  to  clothes  and  to 
room.  This  gave  Sally  a  glorious  opening.  When  particularly  displeased  with 
the  Angel,  she  would  take  over  control  of  the  body  and  then  wreck  the  room, 
turning  the  drawers  inside  out  and  piling  everything  in  a  heap  in  the  middle  of 
the  floor.  All  these  little  tricks  Sally  used  as  a  club  on  the  Angel.  In  other 
words,  "don't  take  the  body  to  church;  or  else-.  Do  as  I  say,  and  I'll  leave  you  in 
relative  peace,  be  obstinate  and  I'll  'turn  on  the  heat'."  The  reader  will  please 
note  that  this  is  not  a  case  taken  from  a  novel,  as  Dr.  Jekyll  and  Mr.  Hyde,  but 


is  an  actual  situation  reported  by  one  of  our  ablest  psychiatrists.  If  the  reader 
wishes  further  details  than  those  we  give,  we  refer  him  to  Dr.  Prince's  own 
book,  The  Dissociation  o  f  a  Personality. 

Dr.  Prince  then  discovered  that  a  third  personality  was  appearing;  namely,  BIV 
or  the  Woman.  It  is  curious  to  note  that  neither  the  Angel  nor  the  Woman  were 
actually  conscious  of  Sally's  thoughts  and  actions.  Sally  communicated  with 
them  or  rather  delivered  her  ultimatums  by  letter  and  Prince  explained  what  it 
was  all  about.  Neither  were  the  Woman  nor  the  Angel  conscious  of  each  other. 
But  Sally,  from  her  position,  was  aware  of  both  thoughts  and  actions  of  the 
other  two.  As  we  said  before,  these  cases  of  multiple  personality  can  be  very 
complex.  The  Woman  had  a  different  personality  from  either  of  the  others.  She 
was  headstrong,  vain  and  spiteful;  moreover,  she  also  insisted  on  taking  the 
body  to  such  places  as  good  stores  and  good  concerts,  which  Sally  loathed.  So 
Sally  started  a  campaign  against  this  new  menace,  but  discovered  that  the 
Woman  and  the  Angel  were  quite  different  people  to  handle.  She  tried  her 
tricks  but  they  did  not  work.  She  made  a  jumble  sale  of  the  Woman's  clothes, 
and  piled  them  on  the  floor.  The  Woman  promptly  took  Sally's  toys  and  threw 
them  into  the  fire.  The  conflict  was  short  and  sharp,  ending  in  an  armistice  with 
both  sides  in  a  position  of  armed  neutrality.  Unfortunately  they  both  occupied 
the  same  body,  so  there  were  definite  limits  to  which  either  could  go.  Sally 
would  cheerfully  have  cut  off  the  Woman's  nose  but  she  would  have  been 
literally  spiting  her  own  face.  It  happened  to  be  her  nose  as  well. 

Then  Dr.  Prince  made  another  discovery,  and  here  we  find  again  the  tie-up 
between  hypnotism  and  these  various  states  of  dissociation.  If  he  hypnotized 
either  Bl,  the  Angel,  or  BIV,  the  Woman,  he  got  a  new  personality,  BII,  which 
had  all  the  memories  of  both.  Moreover,  this  new  individual  was  a  much  more 
evenly  balanced  person  than  the  other  two,  more  of  a  real  woman.  This  led 
Prince  to  conclude  that  this  was  the  real  Miss  Beauchamp,  that  the  Angel  and 
the  Woman  were  only  halves,  so  to  speak,  of  BII. 

Yet  whenever  he  awakened  BII,  he  always  got  BI  or  BIV.  However,  with 
persistence  and  by  insisting  in  hypnotism  that  BII  should  awaken  with  the 
memories  of  both  the  Angel  and  the  Woman  he  finally  succeeded  in  awakening 
BII  as  the  real  Miss  Beauchamp.  And  Sally?  She  could  not  be  included  in  the 
personality  synthesis.  By  means  of  hypnotism  she  was  robbed  of  her  power  to 
control  the  body  and  "squeezed"  back  into  her  corner  until  she  would  no  longer 
trouble  the  real  Miss  Beauchamp.  That  involves  a  very  neat  question  in  ethics. 
Sally  was  a  real  personality.  To  what  extent  was  Prince  guilty  of  psychological 
murder,  so  to  speak? 


We  would  wish  to  make  a  point  before  we  proceed,  since  we  wish  later  to  show 
more  clearly  how  and  why  hypnotism  is  of  such  use  in  these  cases;  in  reality 
they  are  caused  by  a  form  of  hypnotism  in  the  first  place!  We  will  see  that 
emotional  shock  produces  exactly  the  same  results  as  hypnotism,  that 
hypnotism  may  in  reality  be  a  form  of  emotional  shock.  We  are  not  clear  on 
this  point,  but  we  do  know  that  shock  gives  us  all  the  phenomena  of  hypnotism 
and  vice  versa.  If  we  read  over  the  Beauchamp  case  or  most  other  such  cases 
we  will  see  that  the  condition  has  been  caused  by  some  severe  emotional  strain. 
What  actually  happened  in  the  Beauchamp  case  appears  to  have  been 
somewhat  as  follows.  A  very  severe  period  of  fear  in  childhood  ending  about 
the  age  of  seven  in  a  bad  fright  received  from  the  father.  This  "split"  the 
personality  into  the  Sally,  or  Bill  and  the  BII  parts.  Sally  remained  the  childish 
creature  she  was  at  that  time  as  a  "co-conscious"  personality,  while  BII 
continued  her  development.  Then  around  the  age  of  eighteen  came  another 
great  shock,  this  time  in  connection  with  her  love  life,  when  BII  split  into  BI, 
the  Angel,  and  BIV,  the  Woman. 

The  reader  will  recall  that  BI  or  BIV  hypnotized  gave  BII.  The  cure  consisted 
of  binding  these  personalities  together  again  by  means  of  hypnotism  in  the  BII 
stage  and  then  in  being  able  to  make  this  personality  strong  enough  so  that  it 
would  still  remain  BII  on  awakening  and  not  return  to  BI  or  BIV.  But  Bill  or 
Sally  had  had  too  long  and  independent  an  existence. 

It  proved  impossible  to  unite  her  personality  with  that  of  BII,  so  the  only  way 
of  solving  this  problem  was  to  repress  her  completely.  Somewhat  of  a  Chinese 
puzzle  but  a  very  interesting  study  accepted  as  true  in  all  psychological  circles. 

When  Dr.  Morton  Prince  was  investigating  the  Beauchamp  case,  a  namesake  of 
his  on  the  west  coast,  Dr.  W.  F.  Prince,  was  unwittingly  making  a  very 
important  contribution  to  this  subject  of  multiple  personality  and  its  very  close 
relationship  to  hypnotism.  The  reader  must  be  careful  to  keep  these  two  men 
separate  for  they  were  both  friendly  enemies  during  their  entire  lives.  W.  F. 
Prince  passed  his  later  years  in  Boston  so  that,  with  Morton  Prince  at  Harvard, 
they  could  really  quarrel  to  their  hearts'  content.  Both,  we  should  add,  were 
men  of  the  very  highest  ability,  names  that  are  respected  and  honored  in  the 
history  of  psychology. 

Dr.  W.  F.  Prince  was  probably  America's  greatest  authority  on  psychic  research 
or  spiritism  for  the  last  ten  or  fifteen  years  before  his  death.  Yet  he  conducted 
his  research  in  this  very  difficult  subject  in  such  a  way  as  to  hold  the  respect  of 
science.  This  is  the  more  remarkable  when  we  bear  in  mind  the  fact  that  his,  of 
all  fields,  is  open  to  suspicion  of  fraud,  prejudice,  and  poor  scientific  methods. 


His  writings,  found  among  the  publications  of  the  Boston  Society  for  Psychic 
Research  as  well  as  the  American  and  British  Societies,  are  always 
characterized  by  moderation  and  a  keen  sense  of  scientific  judgment.  The 
unwitting  contribution  of  W.  F.  Prince  to  this  subject  of  multiple  personality 
came  about  somewhat  as  follows.  Dr.  Morton  Prince  was  receiving  great 
publicity  in  scientific  circles  for  his  excellent  work  with  Miss  Beauchamp,  and 
in  the  early  1900's  very  little  was  known  about  such  cases.  W.  F.  Prince  in  his 
ceaseless  search  for  the  one  best  spiritistic  medium  was  working  with  a  girl, 
Doris  Fischer.  He  was  astonished  to  find  that  Miss  Fischer  was  also  a  case  of 
multiple  personality  and,  following  the  technique  of  the  Harvard  man,  he  used 
hypnotism  to  investigate  his  very  interesting  subject.  To  his  astonish-  ment  and 
that  of  the  world  in  general  this  case  developed  in  almost  identical  fashion  to 
that  of  Miss  Beauchamp.  There  was  a  Sally,  an  Angel,  and  a  Woman,  although 
W.  F.  Prince  did  not  use  these  names.  Moreover  in  the  course  of  the  treatment 
he  cured  the  condition  in  a  fashion  very  similar  to  that  used  by  Morton  Prince. 
His  Angel  and  his  Woman  were  brought  together  as  the  real  Miss  Fischer 
through  hypnotism,  while  his  Sally  was  "squeezed"  into  oblivion.  It  is  of 
interest  to  note  that  he  adopted  Miss  Fischer  as  his  own  daughter  and  after  the 
cure  she  gave  every  appearance  of  being  a  very  healthy,  well  balanced 
personality. 

The  great  significance  of  this  case  lies  in  the  fact  that  W.  F.  Prince,  one  of  the 
most  careful  investigators  almost  certainly  created  this  case  of  multiple 
personality  through  the  use  of  hypnotism,  and  this  result  was  quite 
unintentional  on  his  part.  A  striking  example  of  the  effects  which  operator 
attitude  may  have.  We  can  visualize  the  process.  Miss  Fischer  was  an  excellent 
hypnotic  subject  and  of  more  than  average  intelligence.  Morton  Prince  was  just 
publishing  his  remarkable  Beauchamp  case.  Dr.  W.  F.  Prince,  later  her  adopted 
father,  was  very  much  interested  in  this,  doubtlessly  the  literature  was  lying 
around  and  he  probably  discussed  the  case  in  her  presence.  He  certainly  had  in 
his  own  mind  a  very  clear  cut  image  of  how  the  Beauchamp  case  was 
progressing.  When  he  began  his  work  with  Miss  Fischer,  somehow  this  picture 
was  conveyed  to  the  subject's  mind,  whether  through  her  own  reading,  his 
discussion  or  through  unconscious  hints  which  he  let  drop.  This  is  almost 
certain  because  these  cases  of  multiple  personality  simply  do  not  follow  a  fixed 
pattern.  The  many  examples  we  have  in  the  literature  are  extremely  varied  as  to 
number  and  type  of  personalities.  That  these  two  most  complex  of  all  cases 
should  be  identical  is  almost  impossible.  The  evidence  is  all  in  favor  of  the  fact 
that  the  Doris  Fischer  case  was  built  up  on  the  spot. 


In  fact  there  are  some  who  will  go  even  farther  and  claim  that  the  Beauchamp 
case  itself  was  at  least  guided  in  its  development  by  the  use  of  hypnotism.  Even 
as  late  as  1905  or  1910  we  did  not  know  nearly  as  much  of  the  importance 
which  operator  attitude  may  assume.  If  two  men  of  this  capacity  could  be 
completely  deceived,  the  reader  will  see  our  reasons  for  questioning  a  great 
deal  of  the  experiments  reported  by  older  investigators. 

The  work  of  the  two  'Princes  carries  us  still  farther  into  this  matter  of 
hypnotism  and  multiple  personality.  It  sheds  some  very  interesting  light  on  the 
problems  presented  by  spiritism,  their  argument  here  centering  around  the 
famous  spirit  medium,  Mrs.  Chenoweth.  The  reader  will  find  her  work 
discussed  at  length  by  W.  F.  Prince  and  others  in  the  proceedings  of  both  the 
American  and  the  British  Societies  for  Psychic  Research.  She  was  probably  the 
best  "mental"  medium  in  America  outside  the  famous  Mrs.  Piper,  at  the  time  of 
this  investigation  an  old  lady. 

Mrs.  Chenoweth  gave  the  typical  picture  of  the  spirit  medium  when  in  trance. 
She  was  controlled  by  the  spirit  of  an  Indian  girl  "Sunbeam"  who  had  been 
killed  by  a  fall  from  a  horse  in  the  West  many  years  ago.  Mrs.  Chenoweth 
would  sit  at  her  table  with  the  "sitter"  on  the  opposite  side.  Then  she  would 
pass  into  the  trance  state  and  Sunbeam  would  come  to  take  charge.  She  would 
chatter  along  at  a  great  rate  in  a  girlish  voice  until  the  sitter  interrupted  by 
reminding  her  that  he  was  there  for  a  purpose.  Then  she  would  suddenly  come 
"down  to  earth"  as  it  were  and  give  the  sitter  information  which  was  supposed 
to  come  from  the  spirit  world. 

Some  of  this  was  very  hard  to  explain  unless  we  admitted  supernormal  power 
on  the  part  of  the  medium.  For  example,  one  of  the  writer's  friends  reports  the 
following.  Sunbeam  said  that  she  saw  standing  beside  him  the  form  of  his 
father,  now  dead.  The  sitter  naturally  asked  how  he  was  to  be  sure  it  was  his 
father.  To  this  Sunbeam  replied. 

"He  says  for  you  to  carry  out  the  following  directions  as  proof.  Go  home,  go  to 
the  cellar,  look  up  his  diary  for  April  16,  1896.  There  you  will  find  that  he 
bought  five  acres  of  land  from  a  Mr.  Jones  on  Long  Island."  The  sitter  went 
home,  looked  up  the  date  in  the  diary  and  found  the  entry  as  described.  He  says 
he  had  never  looked  into  his  father's  diary.  Which  proves  that  he  was  talking  to 
his  father?  By  no  means.  There  are  several  other  possibilities  which  might  have 
explained  it.  The  medium  may  have  been  a  fraud,  have  gotten  hold  of  the  diary 
beforehand  and  so  had  the  information,  although  this  seems  very  improbable. 
Or  the  sitter  may  have  an  hallucination  himself  and  have  looked  up  the  diary 


after  the  manner  of  posthypnotic  suggestion,  rationalizing  later  as  any  good 
hypnotic  subject  will. 


Fantastic?  Possibly,  but  let  us  see  what  Dr.  Morton  Prince  says.  He  was  one  of 
the  world's  best  and  he  also  lived  near  Boston,  so  that  he  could  easily  check  up. 
And  he  did!  His  conclusions  after  investigating  Mrs.  Chenoweth  were  that  she 
was  a  most  interesting  case  of  multiple  personality-nothing  more.  "Sunbeam" 
was  a  sort  of  Sally  and  the  other  controls-for  there  were  others-were  merely  the 
same  thing  he  had  already  seen  in  the  case  of  Miss  Beauchamp.  Certainly  they 
were  not  visitors  from  the  spirit  world  communicating  with  man  through  the 
body  of  Mrs.  Chenoweth. 

His  opinion  was  thus  in  flat  contradiction  to  that  of  W.  F.  Prince.  To  be  sure, 
the  latter  was  always  very  careful  in  his  statements  but  the  writer,  who  knew 
both  these  men,  is  convinced  that  Dr.  W.  F.  Prince  felt  Mrs.  Chenoweth  did 
have  supernormal  abilities.  Just  how  one  would  explain  these  abilities  was  a 
different  matter,  whether  by  spirit-intervention,  telepathy,  or  clairvoyance,  but 
he  was  convinced  they  existed. 

Our  point  is  this.  Here  we  have  possibly  the  two  best  men  in  the  world  as  to 
qualifications  investigating  the  best  medium  in  America.  Their  conclusions 
were  directly  contrary,  the  one  leaning  towards  an  explanation  only  in  terms  of 
multiple  personality,  the  other  strongly  inclined  to  see  the  supernormal  in  the 
revelations  of  the  medium.  If  two  men  of  this  ability  could  not  come  to  a 
solution  of  the  problem,  we  must  not  expect  too  much  from  ourselves. 

But  we  feel  certain  that  we  voice  the  vast  majority  of  psychological  opinion 
when  we  say  that  the  mediumistic  trance  is  nothing  more  than  a  state  produced 
by  autosuggestion,  and  as  such  is  almost  identical  with  the  trance  we  see  in 
somnambulism.  Moreover,  the  various  spirit  controls  are  only  manifestations  of 
multiple  personality,  which  again  is  so  closely  associated  with  hypnotism.  We 
know  that,  with  hypnosis,  we  can  produce  multiple  personality.  Hypnotism  is 
also  recognized  as  the  best  means  to  effect  a  cure.  Furthermore,  every  case  of 
multiple  personality  which  has  been  subject  to  a  psychologist's  experimentation 
has  always  turned  out  to  be  an  excellent  hypnotic  subject.  If  he  does  not  prove 
to  be  such,  we  may  take  it  for  granted  that  he  is  bluffing-for  an  attack  of 
multiple  personality,  a  fugue  such  as  that  suffered  in  the  case  of  Ansel  Bourne, 
can  be  easily  faked  and  affords  the  "patient"  a  beautiful  "out"  when  home 
conditions  become  unbearable. 

The  writer  was  present  when  Professor  William  Brown  of  Oxford  attempted  to 
hypnotize  one  such  case  which  had  received  wide  publicity  in  the  English 


press.  Although  one  of  the  world's  best  operators,  he  had  absolutely  no  success 
and  promptly  stated  that  he  thought  the  subject  had  bluffed  the  whole  thing. 

And  such  was  probably  the  case. 

It  is  quite  impossible  to  discuss  spiritistic  phenomena  at  any  length  in  a  book 
devoted  to  hypnotism.  Space  does  not  permit.  The  writer  had  the  opportunity  of 
doing  two  years'  fairly  intensive  work  on  psychic  research  while  on  scholarship 
at  Harvard  under  the  direction  of  the  late  Professor  William  McDougall  and 
Professor  Gardiner  Murphy,  now  of  City  College  of  New  York.  If  the  reader 
chooses,  he  may  look  up  reference  to  part  of  this  work  in  the  two  excellent 
books  of  J.  B.  Rhine  of  Duke  University,  New  Frontiers  o  f  the  Mind  and 
Extrasensory  Perception.  So  the  writer  has  at  least  a  bowing  acquaintance  with 
the  field  and  feels  that  his  following  statements  would  be  regarded  as  fair  by 
the  vast  majority  of  psychological  opinion  in  the  country. 

First  as  to  the  existence  of  "spiritistic"  phenomena.  Definitely  unproven.  The 
writer  would,  however,  place  himself  on  record  as  being  far  more  optimistic 
here  than  most  of  his  colleagues.  He  insists  that  there  are  many  reports  of 
experiments  and  of  occurrences  which  cannot  be  explained  by  the  normal  laws 
of  psychology  as  we  now  know  them.  Further  that  it  may  be  quite  impossible  to 
prove  "spiritism"  by  the  laboratory  method.  The  cold  scientific  atmosphere 
which  exudes  from  any  professional  psychologist  may  kill  something  essential 
to  the  manifestation  of  the  supernatural.  But  that  is  only  a  personal  opinion  in 
which  the  writer  realizes  he  is  in  a  definite  minority. 

So  first,  "unproven."  Secondly,  why?  Various  reasons.  Above  all  things,  fraud. 
This  is  a  commercial  world  and  many  people  find  it  very  easy  to  make  a 
comfortable  income  by  capitalizing  on  the  desire  which  we  all  possess  for 
absolute  assurance  of  a  life  hereafter,  for  the  ability  to  communicate  with  those 
we  love  who  are  now  dead.  The  writer  recalls  one  very  interesting  and  amusing 
case.  He  was  attending  a  spiritistic  seance  in  London,  England.  During  the 
course  of  this  seance,  which  was  held  in  very  bad  light,  a  chair  travelled  from 
one  side  of  the  room  to  the  other  with  no  visible  means  of  propulsion.  After  the 
meeting  came  to  an  end  he  wandered  over  to  the  chair  and  noticed  it  had 
stopped  over  a  hot  air  register.  The  answer  was  obvious.  A  string  down  the  hot 
air  vent  was  the  cause  of  the  movement. 

At  the  next  seance  he  arrived  early  and  seated  himself  near  the  opening  in 
question,  hoping  that  the  chair  would  repeat  its  performance.  It  did.  So  the 
writer  kept  his  eyes  glued  on  the  chair  convinced  that  sooner  or  later  someone 
would  untie  a  string.  And  they-or  rather  she-did.  For  when  everyone's  attention 
was  concentrated  on  a  guitar  which  was  floating  over  the  medium's  table,  a 


small  hand  clothed  in  a  black  glove  stole  out  from  behind  a  near-by  curtain  to 
untie  the  string.  The  writer  reached  down  and  shook  hands  with  no  intention 
whatsoever  of  creating  a  scene.  There  was  a  ten  second  pause  and  the  owner  of 
the  hand  suddenly  thrust  a  needle  into  the  unwelcome  hand.  This  hurt  like  sin 
so  the  writer  squeezed  and  pulled,  dragging  a  lady  into  the  middle  of  the  floor. 
The  light  immediately  went  on,  the  medium  had  hysterics,  and  the  writer  left  at 
once  by  the  window.  Only  on  his  way  home  did  he  realize  he  had  left  his  hat 
behind  where  it  still  resides  to  this  day  for  all  he  knows. 

We  divide  the  mediums  into  two  broad  groups:  the  physical  mediums  and  the 
mental  mediums.  With  the  physical  medium  "things  happen."  Lights  float 
around  the  room,  music  is  heard,  forms  materialize,  and  objects,  such  as  chairs, 
tables,  or  guitars,  also  float  in  mid  air.  Unfortunately  these  seances  almost 
invariably  take  place  in  light  so  bad  that  it  is  impossible  to  detect  fraud  if  such 
exists.  The  medium  claims  that  the  spirit  forces  cannot  work  in  light.  This  is 
very  unfortunate,  for  it  also  makes  fraud  very  easy.  We  would  also  point  out 
that  the  greatest  of  all  physical  mediums,  D.  D.  Home,  did  his  work  in  broad 
daylight.  He  produced  better  phenomena  than  any  medium  since,  on  one 
occasion  floating  out  one  window  and  in  another  six  stories  up !  And  this  in 
excellent  light!  Unfortunately  he  did  his  work  over  fifty  years  ago.  No  one  has 
been  able  to  duplicate  it  since  and  so  science  is  naturally  sceptical. 

We  are  probably  on  safe  ground  when  we  say  that  the  work  of  the  physical 
medium  does  not  deserve  serious  consideration  from  science.  No  matter  how 
good  the  "controls"  in  darkness  there  will  always  be  the  suspicion  of  fraud.  One 
English  investigator  recently  tried  to  use  the  infra-red  camera,  which  takes 
pictures  in  darkness  by  means  of  rays  invisible  to  the  human  eye.  But  again  the 
"spirits"  became  sensitive  and  demanded  that  it  be  withdrawn.  Science  cannot 
waste  its  time  in  tiresome  investigations  under  conditions  which  will  always  be 
open  to  question. 

The  "mental"  medium,  on  the  other  hand,  gives  us  a  somewhat  different 
problem.  Here  it  is  a  question  of  messages  from  the  dead,  of  clairvoyance,  or  of 
telepathy.  To  be  sure  there  is  plenty  of  fraud  among  mental  mediums  but  at 
least  they  meet  us  on  a  fair  basis.  They  do  not  demand  conditions  which  a  priori 
make  investigation  impossible.  We  may  divide  this  "mental"  group  into  the 
fraudulent  and  the  genuine.  For  an  expose  of  the  method  employed  by  the 
fraudulent  medium  we  would  refer  the  reader  to  two  books,  Abbott,  Behind  the 
Scenes  with  the  Mediums  and  that  by  Price  and  Dingwall,  Revelations  of  a 
Spirit  Medium.  The  genuine  spirit  medium  is  in  a  class  by  himself.  There  can 
be  no  doubt  of  his-or  her- sincerity.  The  "trance"  is  genuine  and  the  various 
spirit  controls  certainly  act  as  if  they  had  nothing  to  conceal.  How,  then,  does 


psychology  explain  the  results  obtained  by  such  great  mediums  as  Mrs.  Piper, 
Mrs.  Leonard,  or  Mrs.  Chenoweth? 


In  the  first  place  the  trance  is  an  excellent  example  of  autohypnosis.  The 
spiritistic  trance  and  the  hypnotic  trance  are  identical  to  all  intents  and 
purposes.  One  is  induced  by  the  subject  himself,  the  other  with  the  aid  of  an 
operator.  Who  are  the  spirit  "controls"  such  as  "Sunbeam"  who  take  over  the 
control  of  the  body  during  these  seances,  reporting  messages  from  the  spirit 
world  and  describing  the  various  dead  friends  whom  we  contact?  Simply  the 
various  personalities  in  a  case  of  multiple  personality,  which  as  we  have  seen  is 
so  closely  tied  up  with  hypnotism. 

The  messages  we  receive?  That  is  another  question.  In  the  writer's  opinion,  a 
question  with  not  nearly  as  convincing  an  answer  as  the  first  two.  First,  we 
have  the  matter  of  unconscious  cues  and  the  possibility  of  great  sense  acuity  on 
the  part  of  the  medium,  or  at  least  great  concentration  on  tiny  details  as  we 
mentioned  in  the  case  where  the  subject  finds  his  mother's  "picture."  Remember 
that  the  hypnotic  and  mediumistic  trance  are  essentially  the  same.  What  applies 
to  one  will  hold  for  the  other.  For  example,  the  writer  was  conducting  some 
card  reading  experiments  with  a  very  intelligent  sitter.  The  subject  not  in 
hypnotism,  was  trying  to  guess  the  playing  card  on  which  the  operator  was 
concentrating.  The  operator  cut  the  jack  of  hearts  and  the  subject  immediately 
named  the  card  correctly;  Then  he  added,  "I'm  sure  of  that  one." 

"Why?" 

"I  heard  you  whisper  it." 

Yet  the  writer  would  have  sworn  he  had  made  no  sound  He  found  this 
occurring  several  times  with  this  subject  an  also  in  isolated  cases  with  other 
subjects.  Now,  in  theory,  this  subject  may  have  had  very  acute  hearing  quite 
apart  from  hypnotic  or  mediumistic  trance.  We  know  from  psychology  that 
thought  generally  involves  tiny  speech  movements.  T1  thinker  literally  "talks  to 
himself."  It  might  be  that  some  people  have  such  extraordinarily  keen  hearing 
that  they  could  pick  t  these  unconscious  and  very  tiny  sounds,  so  receiving 
some  very  valuable  information.  Farfetched,  perhaps,  but  possible. 

This  also  would  apply  to  the  sense  of  vision,  even  more  so  to  the  sense  of 
touch.  Some  mediums  ask  to  hold  the  sitter's  hand  We  all  have  at  least  heard  of 
the  marvelous  ability  of  son  people  at  "muscle  reading."  Suffice  it  here  to  say 
that  this  ability  seems  quite  genuine  and  is  accepted  by  psychology.  Here  the 
medium  could  possibly  pick  up  expression  of  assent  c  dissent  through  muscle 


"twitches."  This  also  may  seem  like  pretty  difficult  theory  to  accept,  but  it  has 
its  points. 

More  important,  possibly,  than  either  of  these  is  the  subject  recognition  of 
changes  in  the  sitter's  face.  Those  subtle  expres-  sions  which  would  tell  her 
when  she  is  "hot"  or  "cold,"  as  she  starts  out  to  make  a  statement.  Here  again 
some  people  ma  have  this  power  of  discrimination  developed  to  a  very  high  de¬ 
gree,  much  higher  than  that  found  in  the  average. 

Then  again  we  find  that  some  mediums  are  expert  at  "fish  ing"  for  information. 
They  will  throw  out  a  hint  or  suggestion,  watch  the  sitter's  reactions  very 
closely  and  immediately  follow  up  with  "No,  that's  wrong,"  if  the  sitter  seems 
to  register  disapproval.  If  the  suggestion  is  acceptable,  they  will  at  once  follow 
up  cautiously,  feeling  their  way,  fishing  for  information,  and  get  results  which 
are  quite  astonishing.  All  this  without  the  sitter's  being  in  any  way  aware  of 
what  is  taking  place. 

The  psychologist  also  has  another  very  potent  criticism  against  the  sitter 
himself.  The  human  memory  is  very  unreliable.  For  a  fine  treatise  on  just  how 
unreliable,  read  the  book  by  Hugo  Miinsterberg,  On  the  Witness  Stand.  We 
cannot  accept  any  reports  of  a  mediumistic  seance  unless  a  secretary  was 
present  and  took  down  all  the  proceedings  in  shorthand. 

The  writer  had  a  case  which  illustrated  this  in  very  fine  style.  A  friend  of  his 
had  a  sitting  with  Mrs.  Chenoweth.  He  came  away  enthusiastic  reporting  that 
the  medium  had  given  him  fine  evidence  that  she  was  actually  talking  with  his 
father.  The  writer  had  this  friend  hand  in  a  report  on  the  sitting,  and  then 
proceeded  to  "work"  on  him  for  the  next  two  weeks  with  a  view  to  making  him 
change  his  story.  Certain  parts  were  greatly  magnified  during  various 
conversations,  others  were  completely  omitted,  certain  new  details  were  seized 
on  and  inserted. 

At  the  end  of  this  two  weeks  period  the  sitter  was  asked  for  another  report  on 
the  plea  that  the  former  one  had  unfortunately  been  lost.  The  two  reports  turned 
out  to  be  very  different,  so  different  in  fact,  that  they  were  quite  worthless  as 
evidence.  The  average  sitter  does  not  realize  how  unreliable  his  own  memory  is 
or  how  his  memory  of  the  seance  may  be  changed  by  later  additions  and 
subtractions.  So,  in  scientific  investigation  we  always  insist  on  a  secretarial 
report  of  what  has  taken  place  at  a  sitting  with  the  "mental"  medium.  Yet,  for 
all  these  objections,  the  writer  still  feels  that  there  are  many  points,  which  have 
not  been  cleared  up.  Read,  for  example,  Podmore's  Phantasms  o  f  the  Living,  or 
look  up  the  sittings  of  Piper,  Chenoweth,  or  Leonard  in  the  proceedings  of  the 


various  societies  previously  mentioned.  The  writer  does  not  claim  that  they 
prove  spiritism,  even  the  supernatural  but  they  certainly  have  not  been 
explained  away  to  his  satisfaction.  Also  many  experiments  on  straight  telepathy 
included  in  these  proceedings  as  well  as  evidence  for  clairvoyance.  Whatever 
the  explanation,  they  are  not  as  yet  explained.  Nor  are  the  results  obtained  by 
Rhine  at  Duke  University  to  be  brushed  aside  lightly  as  many  of  our  critics 
seem  to  think.  The  waving  of  the  magical  psychological  wand  with  the  word 
"bunk"  may  satisfy  the  magician  but  not  the  audience. 

In  later  chapters  we  will  develop  at  greater  length  on  this  thesis  of  states  closely 
related  to  hypnotism.  For  example,  read  Healy's  book,  Mental  Conflicts  and 
Misconduct.  Bear  in  mind  that  emotion  gives  identical  results  with  hypnotism 
and  see  how  easily  his  cases  of  kleptomania  or  compulsive  stealing  fit  into  the 
picture  of  the  posthypnotic  suggestion.  No  hypnotist  in  his  laboratory  could 
have  done  better  than  nature  "in  the  raw." 

Indeed,  so  closely  related  is  all  functional  insanity  to  the  phenomena  of 
hypnotism  and  suggestibility  that  the  picture  seems  almost  too  simple.  The 
compulsions,  fears,  and  delusions  of  the  insane  and  the  neurotics  look  very 
much  like  the  posthypnotic  suggestion  while  the  so-called  Freudian  "complex" 
is  literally  its  twin  brother. 

Crime,  insanity,  but  most  important  of  all,  our  everyday  life.  We  can  more  or 
less  isolate  the  two  first  in  our  jails  and  our  asylums.  At  any  rate  we  don't 
approve  of  criminals  and  the  insane,  but  we  do  most  sincerely  approve  of 
ourselves  and  our  neighbors.  And  here,  unfortunately,  is  where  hypnotism  does 
its  most  terrible  damage.  Consider  the  present  World  War.  All  the  insanity  and 
crime  we  have  in  this  world  of  ours  becomes  a  colorless  grey  compared  to  the 
lurid  red  of  bursting  bombs  and  torpedoes. 

It  has  always  been  the  writer's  contention  that  Hitler  is  the  greatest  hypnotist  of 
our  day,  and  this  statement  is  not  just  a  play  upon  words.  To  be  sure  he  may 
never  have  read  a  book  on  the  subject  or  know  the  meaning  of  the  word.  We 
recall  the  gentleman  in  the  old  French  play  who  was  delighted  to  find  he  had 
been  speaking  prose  all  his  life.  We  can  I  think,  make  out  a  very  convincing 
case  that  basically  Hitler's  emotional  domination  of  the  crowd-or,  speaking 
professionally,  his  attack,  is  only  the  attack  of  the  stage  hypnotist,  one  step 
removed.  If  we  can  only  understand  the  laws  beneath  mob  psychology,  perhaps 
we  can  be  happier  and  more  useful  in  this  sadly  torn  world  of  today.  And  then, 
again,  perhaps  we  cannot.  That  will  depend  on  ourselves. 


Chapter  5  THE  BASIC  NATURE  OF  HYPNOTISM 


MAN  is  incurably  a  mystic.  Ever  since  the  day,  some  one  hundred  thousand 
years  ago,  that  old  Neanderthal  man  first  began  burying  his  dead,  probably  long 
before,  man  rolled  his  eyes  in  horror  at  the  forces  of  magic  and  the  spirits  of  the 
departed.  After  all,  he  had  good  evidence.  He  dreamed  and  in  his  dreams  he 
saw  his  dead  enemies,  so  they  were  still  alive.  His  hazy  thinking  could  not  keep 
dreams  and  reality  separated.  Then  again  in  his  dreams  he  visited  places  many 
miles  away,  so  obviously  his  spirit  could  leave  his  own  body  in  sleep  and  travel 
long  distances.  These  events  were  very  real  to  him. 

We  have  a  story  from  Australia  that  on  one  occasion  a  tribe  of  friendly  blacks 
suddenly  swept  down  on  a  settlement,  killing  and  burning  in  the  most  ferocious 
manner.  Why?  The  medicine  man  had  a  dream.  He  was  at  the  white  settlement 
and  the  whites  were  preparing  to  attack  them,  their  friends.  He  was  so  furious 
over  this  treachery  that  he  promptly  gathered  all  his  followers  together  and  tried 
to  wipe  out  the  whole  lot.  From  his  viewpoint  he  was  quite  right.  His  spirit  had 
visited  the  white  village  and,  after  all,  he  could  certainly  believe  his  own  eyes. 

This  may  seem  very  silly  to  us  but  it  was  terribly  real  to  our  ancestors.  With  the 
Australian  no  death  was  natural,  everyone  died  by  magic.  So  when  your  brother- 
died  the  medicine  man,  with  his  own  magic,  found  out  who  killed  him.  Then  it 
was  your  duty,  as  his  brother,  to  carry  on  the  "blood  feud,"  and  kill  the  culprit. 
His  relations  did  the  same  and  everyone  was  happy,  for  these  old  savages 
dearly  loved  the  warpath. 

One  of  the  very  worst  tricks  you  could  possibly  play  on  your  enemy  was  to 
move  him  or  disguise  him  when  he  was  asleep.  In  sleep  the  spirit  left  the  body 
and  wandered  over  the  country.  That  was  quite  clear  from  dreams.  So  you 
waited  until  your  opponent  was  sound  asleep  then  quietly  moved  him  to 
another  house.  Or  just  as  good,  you  put  a  mask  over  his  face.  Then  the 
returning  spirit  could  not  find  the  body  to  which  it  belonged  and  your  hated 
enemy  went  insane,  robbed  of  his  soul.  Ridiculous?  Yes,  but  many  a  savage  has 
died  in  quick  violent  fashion,  for  playing  just  such  pranks  on  his  neighbors. 

Even  Plato,  the  great  Greek  philosopher,  agreed  that  anyone  found  sticking  pins 
in  a  wax  doll  should  be  put  to  death.  It  was  perfectly  reasonable.  No  one  would 
deny  the  power  of  magic.  One  of  the  best  ways  of  killing  your  enemy  was  to 
make  an  image  of  him  in  wax  then  stick  it  full  of  pins.  Better  still,  put  the  wax 
figure  in  front  of  the  fire.  As  it  gradually  melted  away  he  would  weaken  and 
die.  Indeed  only  one  hundred  fifty  years  ago  in  Europe  we  find  the  hospital 
conditions  terrible.  The  insane  were  chained  in  the  filthy  cells  of  Bedlam  or 
other  hospitals,  sport  for  the  public  who  were  allowed  to  prod  them  with  poles 
or  stick  them  with  pins.  Insanity  was  the  result  of  evil  spirits  and  man  could  do 


nothing  against  these.  God  was  punishing  them  for  their  sins,  so  man  helped  on 
the  good  work,  making  their  lives  a  living  tragedy. 

We  must  always  bear  these  facts  in  mind  when  we  consider  the  history  and  the 
theories  of  hypnotism.  Of  all  branches  of  science  it  was  the  most  weird,  lent 
itself  best  to  a  mystic  explanation,  as  is  evident  even  today.  Many  parents  who 
would  not  hesitate  to  have  their  children's  tonsils  out  tomorrow,  if  necessary, 
would  be  pretty  horrified  if  the  doctor  suggested  using  hypnotism  to  cure,  shall 
we  say,  nail  biting.  We  are  not  so  very  far  ahead  of  our  head  hunting  ancestors. 
And  hypnotism,  without  doubt  originated  right  back  among  such  ancestors.  Not 
as  hypnotism,  to  be  sure,  but  as  part  of  their  religious  and  mystic  ceremonies. 
For  example,  in  the  initiation  ceremony  of  the  Chippewa  Indians  we  have  as 
fine  a  form  of  group  hypnotism  as  the  best  operator  could  demand.  The  boys  at 
initiation  were  lulled  into  this  magic  sleep  by  the  chanting  of  the  medicine  man 
and  there  instructed  in  tribal  customs.  Some  even  developed  anaesthesia  to  pain 
and  later  performed  prodigies  of  valor  without  feeling  their  own  wounds. 

But  this  could  hardly  be  classed  as  hypnotism,  although  it  was  indeed  that.  The 
Indian  knew  nothing  of  the  scientific  laws  governing  the  state  and  while  he 
used  it  most  effectively  it  was  always  linked  with  the  supernatural.  So  also 
were  the  sleeptemples  of  ancient  Egypt.  To  these  the  sufferer  would  come, 
would  be  thrown  into  trance  by  the  priest  and  while  in  trance  would  be  visited 
by  the  various  gods  who  were  the  patron  saints  of  medicine.  These  temples 
later  made  their  way  into  Greece  and  Asia  Minor,  and  represent  a  very 
interesting  stage  in  the  development  of  hypnotism  but  contributed  nothing.  The 
practices  used  herein  appear  to  have  vanished  completely  with  the  arrival  of  the 
Christian  era.  Then  hypnotism  and  all  its  many  related  phenomena  passed  into 
oblivion,  so  far  as  actual  practice  was  concerned.  The  Church  had  a  hearty 
distrust  of  all  such  "black  cults,"  linked  them  to  the  devil  himself,  and  anyone 
practicing  the  same  might  easily  find  himself  burning  at  a  stake.  We  have  some 
most  interesting  tales  of  persecution  during  the  so-called  dark  ages,  by  the 
Catholic  Church  at  first,  but  in  later  times  by  the  Protestant  Church  and  by  the 
lay  authorities  themselves.  We  cannot  fix  blame  for  this  on  any  one  group.  All 
humanity  had  an  unreasoning  fear  of  black  magic  and  rooted  it  out  with  savage 
brutality.  One  German  story  shows  how,  at  least  in  one  instance,  the  victim 
turned  the  tables  on  his  persecutors  in  tragic  style.  A  German  was  to  be  tried  for 
sorcery.  He  was  an  alchemist,  one  of  those  very  early  chemists  who  were 
regarded  as  the  blackest  of  the  black.  He  realized  he  had  no  chance  of  escape, 
so  wrote  his  daughter  asking  her  to  come  and  watch  the  fun. 

Half  a  dozen  judges  presided  at  the  trial  under  the  chairmanship  of  a  prince. 

The  culprit  was  brought  in  and  formally  accused  of  being  a  wizard.  He  at  once 


pleaded  guilty,  and  that,  so  to  speak,  was  that.  But  with  the  victim  safely 
convicted  his  judges  decided  on  getting  some  information.  Very  famous  in 
these  days  was  the  "witch's  supper"  at  which  all  these  people  were  supposed  to 
gather  and  plot  against  honest  men.  So  one  of  the  judges  asked  the  victim,  since 
he  admitted  his  guilt,  to  tell  them  when  the  witches  had  last  met. 

"Sunday  at  midnight." 

"Will  you  describe  it  to  us?" 

"I  would  gladly,  but  why  waste  time?  You  were  there." 

"I  was  not." 

"You  certainly  were.  You  and  these  other  two  judges,"  singling  out  two  more 
whom  he  particularly  disliked.  "Prince,  I  accuse  these  three  men  of  wizardry." 
Then  he  went  on  to  describe  a  weird  scene  in  which  he,  the  three  accused,  and 
the  other  witches  were  plotting  to  spread  a  terrible  pestilence  over  the  whole 
state.  Result? 

"Burn  the  lot  of  them,"  said  the  Prince. 

We  imagine  that  questions  were  a  little  more  discreet  from  then  on.  The 
scientific  study  of  hypnotism  begins  with  a  Viennese  doctor  named  Mesmer 
who  lived  during  the  American  Revolution.  As  a  matter  of  fact,  Benjamin 
Franklin,  as  our  ambassador  to  France,  sat  on  a  board  of  the  French  Academy 
of  Medicine  which  pronounced  Mesmer  a  fraud  and  drove  him  from  Paris. 

Actually  this  man  was  not  a  fraud  in  any  sense  of  the  word.  His  ideas  are  weird 
as  we  read  them  one  hundred  seventy  years  after  his  time,  but  Mesmer  was 
probably  quite  sincere  in  all  his  statements.  We  must  bear  in  mind  that  he  lived 
at  the  dawn  of  medical  science,  at  a  time  when  Franklin  himself  said,  "There 
are  good  doctors  and  bad  doctors  but  the  best  doctor  is  no  doctor." 

In  reality  Mesmer  contributed  practically  nothing  to  the  science  of  hypnotism. 
Hull  says,  "His  theories  are  of  very  considerable  interest  to  the  historian  of  the 
growth  of  science,  perhaps  not  so  much  for  the  amount  of  truth  they  contained 
as  because  it  has  taken  the  world  such  a  long  time  to  separate  the  grain  of  truth 
from  its  enormous  husk  of  error."  (l)Clark  L.,  Hypnosis  and  Suggestibility,  p. 

5. 

The  University  of  Vienna  at  that  time  had  perhaps  the  world's  best  medical 
school.  Here  he  wrote  his  medical  thesis  in  1766  on  the  influence  of  the  planets 
upon  the  bodies  of  men!  Today  no  medical  school  in  the  world  would  consider 
such  trash,  but  times  have  changed.  Then  anaesthesia  was  unknown,  the  germ 
theory  was  still  one  hundred  years  in  the  future  and  insanity  was  the  work  of 
the  devil.  So  we  must  judge  Mesmer  in  the  light  of  his  times,  a  capable  doctor 


who  dared  to  blaze  new  trail  and  who  was  master  of  the  medical  knowledge  of 
his  time,  such  as  it  was.  To  be  sure  he  had  a  very  shrewd  financial  eye  and  used 
his  knowledge  to  fill  his  own  purse.  But  that  is  not  unheard  of,  even  in  this 
enlightened  twentieth  century. 

Mesmer  was  a  very  keen  observer.  The  principle  of  the  magnet  with  its  two 
poles  was  just  being  investigated.  He  noted  that  the  magnet-like  the  planets- 
could  exert  its  influence  at  a  distance.  So  he  worked  out  his  theory.  The  human 
body,  with  its  two  sides,  was  like  a  magnet,  with  its  two  poles.  Disease  was 
caused  by  an  improper  distribution  of  the  magnetic  fluid,  the  animal  magnetism 
which  this  living  magnet  threw  off  and  to  cure  disease  we  had  to  restore  the 
balance,  so  to  speak. 

This  animal  magnetism  was  a  gas  or  fluid,  therefore  somewhat  different  from 
that  of  the  minerals.  It  was  under  the  control  of  the  human  will,  hence  to  this 
day  we  have  the  tradition  of  "will  power"  in  hypnotism.  To  direct  its  flow  the 
individual  must  concentrate  with  all  his  strength  and  look  his  victim  firmly  in 
the  eye.  Hence  the  "dark  hypnotic  eye."  Then  as  it  flowed  largely  from  the 
hand,  the  operator  would  make  long  passes  over  the  body  of  his  patient,  from 
his  head  to  his  toes,  passing  the  fluid  into  the  sufferer's  body.  Should  the 
subject  go  into  a  trance,  he  was  awakened  by  reversing  the  process.  The  passes 
went  from  toes  to  head,  so  withdrawing  the  influence.  Mesmer  actually  never 
got  quite  this  far,  but  such  was  the  standard  practice  of  his  immediate 
followers,  the  "Mesmerists,"  and  we  see  many  of  these  practices  still  used  by 
the  stage  hypnotist. 

In  reality  he  had  quite  a  lot  to  go  on  here,  for  the  magnetic  fluid  was  quite 
visible-to  some  people.  Many  "sensitives"  could  actually  see  it  streaming  from 
the  eyes  and  hands  of  the  operator.  Of  course,  this  was  simply  a  visual 
hallucination,  now  so  well  known  in  hypnotism.  But  in  Mesmer's  time  no  one 
realized  that  such  a  thing  existed  so  there  was  no  reason  to  reject  the  word  of 
those  somnambulists  who  reported  and  described  the  fluid  in  question. 

This  fluid  had  many  interesting  qualities.  It  could  be  reflected  by  mirrors.  It 
could  operate  at  a  distance.  More  interesting,  it  could  be  confined  in  a  bottle 
and  shipped  to  a  sufferer  in  any  part  of  the  world.  Most  interesting  of  all  any 
good  "magnetist"  could  magnetize  any  object,  generally  a  tree  in  the  village 
green.  Then  the  whole  village  could  gather  round  this  tree,  receive  the  benefits 
of  Mesmer's  great  discovery-and  the  operator  collect  his  fee. 

Mesmer's  own  clinic  in  Paris  deserves  special  mention,  for  it  must  have  been  a 
remarkable  sight.  The  large  hall  was  darkened  and  soft  plaintive  music 


accompanied  the  treatment.  Here  was  the  famous  baquet,  a  huge  open  tub  about 
a  foot  high,  large  enough  for  thirty  people  to  stand  around  for  treatments.  The 
tub  itself  was  filled  with  water,  bottles  arranged  in  a  symmetrical  order,  iron 
filings  and  ground  glass.  The  whole  thing  was  provided  with  a  wooden  cover 
and  through  this  cover  came  jointed  iron  rods  which  the  patients  applied  to 
their  ailing  parts.  Mesmer  himself  would  appear  at  the  right  moment  in  a  robe 
of  brilliant  silk,  passing  his  hands  over  the  patients,  fixing  them  with  his  gaze 
and  touching  them  with  his  iron  wand.  People  suffering  from  all  kinds  of 
sicknesses  were  cured  after  a  few  such  treatments.  This  is,  of  course,  exactly 
what  we  would  expect  from  our  present  day  knowledge  of  hypnotism. 

Mesmer's  success  was  probably  his  undoing,  for  he  drew  much  trade  away 
from  the  regular  doctors.  These  only  needed  some  excuse  to  vent  their  spleen 
and  the  opportunity  came  in  1784  for  the  French  Government  appointed  a 
commissionincluding  Franklin-to  investigate  the  whole  thing.  This  pronounced 
Mesmer  a  fraud.  Immediately  his  popularity  fell  off  awl  he  left  Paris  shortly 
afterward.  This  verdict  meant  very  little  when  we  consider  the  ignorance  of  the 
eighteenth  century  doctor.  Vesalius  was  almost  burned  at  the  stake  when,  a 
little  before  this  time,  he  insisted  on  cutting  up  human  corpses  to  study 
anatomy.  After  Leeuvenhoek  discovered  the  microscope  and  described  germs  it 
needed  two  hundred  years  and  the  genius  n(  a  Pasteur  for  "science"  to 
recognize  that  they  might  be  of  importance  So,  even  had  Mesmer  been  right  the 
verdict  would  probably  have  been  the  same.  It  so  happened  he  was  wrongbut 
honestly  wrong. 

But,  as  we  said  before,  Mesmer  contributed  practically  nothing  to  modern 
hypnotism.  His  theories  were  completely  wrong  and  most  of  his  pupils 
followed  blindly  in  his  lead.  He  did,  however,  "throw  the  fat  in  the  fire,"  so  to 
speak.  Once  he  had  invented  his  technique,  it  was  almost  impossible  not  to 
stumble  on  the  phenomena  of  modem  hypnotism.  The  fact  that  {t  took  one 
hundred  years  for  the  story  to  unravel  itself,  and  that  we  still  know  so  little 
about  many  important  phases  merely  illustrates  the  slow  pace  at  which  science 
must  progress. 

Mesmer  did  not  hypnotize  or  try  to  hypnotize  his  subjects.  Nevertheless  some 
of  then  went  into  spontaneous  hysterical  convulsion  as  they  received  treatment 
around  the  tub.  These  convulsive  attacks  came  more  and  more  into  the 
limelight.  A  report  from  the  Royal  Society  of  Medicine  at  this  time  says,  "From 
a  curative  point  of  view  animal  magnetism  is  nothing  but  the  art  of  making 
sensitive  people  fall  into  convulsions." 

In  1784  one  of  Mesmer's  pupils,  the  Marquis  de  Puysegur,  stumbled  across 
genuine  hypnotic  somnambulism.  He  "magnetized"  a  young  shepherd,  Victor, 


but  this  boy  fell  into  a  quiet  sleeping  trance  instead  of  into  the  usual  convulsive 
attack.  In  this  state  he  went  about  his  business  and  when  he  "awakened"  knew 
nothing  of  what  had  happened.  This  was  something  entirely  new  and,  as  such, 
immediately  attracted  great  attention.  Mesmerism,  by  sheer  accident  was  on  its 
way  to  becoming  hypnotism.  To  be  sure  the  main  interest  in  this  new 
phenomenon  of  somnambulism  was  mystic.  The  subject  was  supposed  to 
develop  clairvoyant  powers,  to  have  the  gift  of  thought  transference,  even  to 
speak  with  the  dead.  At  the  same  time  the  ,  mesmerists  were  getting 
dangerously  near  the  truth,  so  near  that  discovery  of  the  real  facts  was  just  a 
matter  of  time.  By  1825  hallucinations,  anaesthesia  and  the  posthypnotic 
suggestion  had  all  been  described. 

Yet  progress  was  painfully  slow.  One  of  the  greatest  figures  in  these  days  was 
an  Englishman  named  Braid.  He  did  his  early  work  in  the  1840's,  first  used  the 
term  hypnotism,  rejected  completely  the  idea  of  the  magnetic  fluid  and  saw  that 
hypnotism  was  something  quite  different  from  ordinary  sleep.  He  also  invented 
an  hypnotic  technique,  still  used  by  many  operators,  that  of  gazing  at  a  bright 
object  held  in  such  a  position  as  to  strain  the  eyes. 

But  we  still  find  that  weird  mixture  of  truth  and  absurd  error.  Phrenology  was 
then  in  vogue  and  Braid  supported  the  theory  known  as  phreno-magnetism.  He 
found  with  his  subjects  that  if  he  pressed  the  "bump"  of  pugnacity,  the  subject 
would  promptly  want  to  fight,  if  it  were  that  of  reverence,  the  subject  might  fall 
on  his  knees  and  pray.  In  his  later  writings  he  saw  the  absurdity  of  these  claims 
and  even  appears  to  have  hit  the  real  keynote  of  hypnotism,  namely, 
suggestibility.  Braid  was  more  or  less  the  voice  of  one  crying  in  the  wilderness. 
With  his  death  there  was  no  further  immediate  interest  in  England. 

The  French,  however,  were  more  alert  to  possibilities.  Around  1815,  the  Abbe 
Faria  made  a  very  important  discovery.  If  the  prospective  subjects  were  seated 
around  the  room  and  allowed  to  relax,  then  the  operator  had  merely  to  repeat 
the  word  "sleep"  several  times  in  an  impressive  voice.  Certain  of  those  present 
would  at  once  fall  into  somnambulism.  This  was  a  very  Important  step  and  the 
French  investigation  finally  ended  in  the  work  of  Fiebeault,  the  real  father  of 
modem  hypnotism. 

This  man  was  one  of  those  peculiar  people  who  mark  off  the  milestones  in 
science.  A  physician,  he  settled  at  Nancy,  France  in  1864.  Here  he  proceeded  to 
practice  hypnotism  among  the  poor,  refusing  any  fees  for  his  services.  He  even 
wrote  a  book  setting  forth  his  theories  on  the  subject-and  sold  exactly  one  copy. 


But  that  did  not  discourage  Liebeault.  For  twenty  years  he  kept  at  his  task. 

Then,  fortunately,  he  won  the  enmity  of  a  great  French  physician,  Bernheim,  a 
professor  in  the  medical  school  at  Nancy.  Bernheim  for  six  months  had  been 
treating  a  patient  suffering  from  sciatica,  with  no  success  whatsoever.  In 
desperation  this  patient  turned  to  Liebeault,  who  quickly  cured  him  by  means 
of  hypnotism.  This,  to  Bernheim,  was  a  professional  insult.  He  knew  of 
Liebeault,  thought  him  a  "quack"  and  decided  he  would  expose  this  medical 
menace.  So  he  visited  his  enemy's  clinic-and  realized  that  Liebeault  was  really 
a  genius.  Bernheim  immediately  began  a  serious  study  of  hypnotism  and  for  the 
next  twenty  years  devoted  all  his  great  talents  to  serious  work  along  these  lines. 
His  position  gave  the  subject  respectable  standing  and  to  his  eternal  honor,  he 
never  overlooked  an  opportunity  of  directing  attention  to  Liebeault.  The  latter 
even  sold  the  remaining  copies  of  his  book! 

Bernheim  realized  that  the  key  to  hypnotism  was  suggestion.  A  doctor,  his 
main  interest  was  along  medical  lines  and  his  great  book  Suggestive 
Therapeutics  covers  this  field  in  great  detail.  This  work  stands  in  a  class  by 
itself,  only  surpassed  by  the  very  recent  book  of  Clark  L.  Hull,  Yale  University. 
Hull,  as  a  psychologist,  has  a  much  wider  range  of  interests  than  did  Bernheim, 
so  he  broadens  the  field  and  attacks  the  problems  with  modern  experimental 
methods. 

Bernheim  perfected  the  "sleeping  technique"  now  so  widely  used  in  laboratory 
practice  and  described  carefully  all  the  phenomena  which  we  have  noted  in 
Chapter  II  of  this  work. 

But  animal  magnetism,  like  the  cat,  proved  to  have  the  proverbial  nine  lives. 
While  Bernheim  was  doing  his  great  work  in  Nancy,  France,  another 
Frenchman,  Charcot,  was  investigating  hypnotism  in  Paris.  Charcot  gives  us  a 
classic  example  of  what  may  happen  when  an  authority  in  one  field  attempts 
work  in  another.  One  of  the  world's  great  anatomists  and  neurologists,  Charcot 
did  pioneer  work  in  these  fields  which  was  of  the  very  highest  grade.  In 
hypnotism  he  made  about  every  possible  mistake.  This  is  the  more  amazing 
because  Bernheim,  also  in  France,  pointed  out  these  errors  as  they  occurred. 

Major  hypnotism,  as  Charcot  labelled  his  discovery,  showed  three  sharply 
marked  stages;  lethargy,  catalepsy  and  somnambulism.  In  the  first,  induced  by 
closing  the  subject's  eyes,  he  could  neither  hear  nor  speak.  If  now  the  subject's 
eyes  were  opened  he-or  rather  she,  for  he  worked  only  with  womenwas  still 
unable  to  hear  or  speak.  But  in  this  cataleptic  stage  the  limbs  would  remain  in 
any  position  in  which  they  were  placed.  Finally,  if  the  top  of  the  head  were 


rubbed  somnambulism  was  induced.  This  was  practically  the  same  as  the  trance 
described  by  Bernheim. 


Many  of  the  results  obtained  by  Charcot  were  amazing  and  can  be  attributed  to 
his  complete  ignorance  of  operator  attitude.  He,  as  Mesmer  one  hundred  years 
previously,  was  convinced  that  the  magnet  and  the  principle  of  magnetism 
explained  everything.  If  the  subject  had  a  paralysis  or  a  contracture  in  his  right 
leg,  then,  if  a  magnet  were  brought  close  to  the  leg  it  would  immediately  shift 
to  the  left.  More  interesting,  certain  drugs  could  make  their  power  felt  right 
through  a  corked  bottle.  A  closed  phial  of  alcohol  held  near  the  subject's  head 
would  give  the  proverbial  "jag,"  certainly  an  inexpensive  way  of  going  going 
on  a  spree. 

Bernheim  showed  that  all  these  curious  effects  could  be  produced  when  they 
were  described  in  the  subject's  presence,  and  it  will  be  recalled  that  Charcot 
maintained  his  subjects  were  completely  deaf  in  his  first  two  stages.  How  a 
man  of  his  scientific  skill  could  have  made  such  a  childish  slip  is  difficult  to 
see,  but  he  did.  Bernheim  produced  all  Charcot's  phenomena  by  this  means, 
then  went  a  step  further.  He  substituted  for  for  the  magnet  a  pencil,  a  piece  of 
paper  or  nothing  at  all,  but  he  got  just  as  good  results.  In  other  words,  the 
subject  knew  what  was  expected  and  obliged. 

In  vain  did  Bernheim  point  out  to  Charcot  that  the  subject  In  hypnotism  is 
never  deaf,  is  always  on  the  alert  for  any  suggestion.  Charcot  sailed  serenely 
on.  More  amazing  still  is  the  fact  that  his  great  pupil,  Alfred  Binet,  sailed  right 
along  with  him.  Another  classic  example  of  how  the  greatest  minds  may  be 
blinded  by  prejudice.  For  Binet  was  a  great  mind,  the  father  of  the  Binet-Simon 
test,  one  of  the  greatest  contributions  to  psychology,  and  also  the  author  of  La 
Suggestibilite,  an  original  and  scientific  work.  Yet  with  Fere  he  published  in 
1888  Iris  classic  book,  Animal  Magnetism.  This  was  no  doubt  inspired  by 
Bernheim's  own  work,  Suggestive  Therapeutics,  which  came  off  the  press  two 
years  before.  Binet  rose  in  defense  of  his  beloved  master,  Charcot,  running  a 
series  of  experiments  intended  to  prove  beyond  any  question  that  Charcot  was 
right. 

Hull,  who  is  very  impartial  on  all  subjects,  writes  as  follows  on  this  attempt  of 
Binet,  "Even  so,  the  fact  remains  that  there  has  rarely  been  written  a  book 
containing  a  greater  aggregation  of  results  from  wretched  experiments,  all  put 
forward  with  loud  protestations  of  impeccable  scientific  procedure  and 
buttressed  by  the  most  transparent  sophistries,  than  this  work  of  Binet  and 
Fere."  (2)  Clark  L.  Hull,  Hypnosis  and  Suggestibility,  p.  16. 


It  is  curious  indeed  that  two  really  great  men,  2  Charcot  and  Binet,  could  have 
made  such  grotesque  errors  as  did  these  two,  even  when  they  invaded  a  field 
with  which  they  were  unfamiliar. 

Bernheim  and  his  "Nancy"  school  finally  laid  the  ghost  of  animal  magnetism, 
although  every  so  often  we  find  some  operator  who  is  still  a  follower,  at  least  in 
part,  of  Charcot's  teaching.  One  of  these  is  Professor  William  Brown  of  Oxford, 
a  psychologist  of  excellent  repute.  He  does  not  for  one  moment  support 
Charcot's  crude  ideas  of  magnetism  but  does  follow  the  "Paris"  school  in  one 
interesting  and  rather  important  detail.  Charcot  worked  only  with  hysterical 
women  patients,  and  advanced  the  theory  that  hypnotism  was  a  symptom  of 
hysteria.  This  Bernheim  vehemently  denied  and  his  views  are  almost 
universally  accepted. 

Nevertheless  Brown  still  holds  to  this  attitude  and  his  opinion  is  certainly 
entitled  to  great  respect.  The  writer,  one  of  Brown's  former  pupils,  feels  that  he 
is  wrong  in  this  stand.  The  Oxford  psychologist  is  really  a  psychiatrist.  It  is  just 
possible  that  too  much  association  with  mental  disease  has  given  Professor 
Brown  a  bias  in  this  direction,  a  tendency  to  regard  everything  abnormal  as 
symptomatic  of  a  sick  personality;  but  he  still  lodges  a  minority  protest.  The 
great  majority  of  psychologists  would  point  out  that  good  hypnotic  subjects,  as 
a  rule  seem  to  be  very  normal  people.  To  be  sure,  certain  signs  of  dissociation 
as  automatic  writing,  sleep  walking,  even  hysteria,  generally  indicate  a  good 
subject.  But  most  people  who  can  be  put  into  trance  have  no  such  history. 
Brown  would  reply  that,  in  these  cases,  they  are  "potential"  hysterics  and  the 
dispute  must  rest  there  until  we  have  more  evidence. 

Bernheim  himself  made  one  serious  error.  He  linked  hypnotism  with  sleep, 
regarding  the  trance  as  a  special  form  of  normal  sleep.  As  a  matter  of  fact,  this 
is  a  very  natural  mistake  to  make,  one  into  which  Pavlov,  the  great  Russian 
psychologist,  also  fell.  But  if  the  reader  cares  to  look  up  the  experimental 
evidence  on  the  subject,  as  set  forth  by  Hull,  he  will  be  convinced  that  sleep 
and  hypnosis  have  very  little  in  common.  The  subject  is  so  much  "awake"  that 
it  would  be  quite  impossible  for  the  reader  to  detect  anything  wrong,  especially 
when  the  subject  in  question  has  been  coached  to  act  "normal."  Moreover,  if  we 
test  the  person  in  trance,  we  find  that  he  is  quite  normal  in  such  things  as  the 
conditioned  reflex,  memory  span,  psycho-galvanic  reflex  and  other 
psychological  tests. 

Confusion  here  is  very  easy,  especially  when  the  "sleeping"  technique  is  used 
to  induce  hypnotism  and  the  subject  is  not  allowed  to  move  about.  Actually, 
many  subjects  will  go  into  genuine  sleep,  even  snore  and  lose  all  touch  with  the 


operator.  When  told  to  awaken  they  sleep  serenely  on,  but  awaken  quite  easily 
if  the  operator  gives  them  a  slight  shake.  So  the  mistake  of  Bernheim,  Pavlov 
and  many  others  was  quite  natural.  We  needed  the  modern  experimental 
laboratory  to  clear  up  the  fog  on  this  point. 

Bernheim  was  familiar  with  and  described  in  detail  every  phenomenon  of 
hypnotism  with  which  we  are  acquainted  at  the  present  day,  at  least  in  so  far  as 
his  times  and  his  interests  permitted.  Such  modern  psychological  problems  as 
the  formation  of  conditioned  reflexes  under  hypnosis  he  very  naturally  does  not 
mention.  And  he  was  essentially  a  doctor,  interested  in  curing  patients.  Here  he 
was  eminently  successful.  But  by  the  same  token  he  was  not  interested  in  the 
possible  uses  of  hypnotism  in  education,  crime,  or  warfare.  Such  problems 
were  completely  outside  his  field.  Moreover,  practically  all  of  these  early 
authorities,  around  the  close  of  the  nineteenth  century,  were  medical  men,  their 
outlook  was  essentially  that  of  Bernheim,  so  modern  psychology  naturally  finds 
many  a  fascinating  problem  still  unsolved. 

Suggestion  is  undoubtedly  the  key  to  hypnotism.  However,  from  the  theoretical 
point  of  view  we  are  today  faced  with  a  very  interesting  problem.  Is  it 
suggestion  or  dissociation  which  is  really  the  fundamental  cause  of  hypnosis? 
Does  suggestion  cause  dissociation  as  illustrated  in  automatic  writing,  speaking 
with  tongues  and  in  all  hypnotic  phenomena  or  is  it  a  tendency  towards 
dissociation  which  makes  the  good  hypnotic  subject  so  suggestible?  The  writer 
feels  that  suggestion  is  basic.  For  reasons  with  which  we  are  not  familiar  the 
individual  is  highly  suggestible  and  dissociation  comes  as  a  secondary 
phenomenon,  caused  by  this  peculiarity  in  personality.  But  the  issue  is  still 
open.  Also,  in  so  far  as  we  are  concerned  purely  theoretical.  We  can  allow  the 
professional  psychologist  to  ferret  out  the  answer  and  can  proceed  with  our 
discussion.  We  can  also  leave  to  him  that  very  vexing  problem  as  to  whether  all 
suggestion  is  really  autosuggestion,  as  Coue  maintained. 

For  our  purpose  we  can  say  that  hypnotism  is  merely  a  state  of  exaggerated 
suggestibility,  induced  by  artificial  means.  The  vast  majority  of  psychologists 
would  accept  this  formula,  with  of  course  the  usual  reservations.  We  do  not 
know  what  causes  suggestibility.  Is  it  acquired  or  inherited?  Does  it  depend  on 
dissociation  or  vice  versa?  We  will  admit  our  ignorance  and  proceed  from  the 
assumption  that  suggestion  is  the  key  to  hypnosis. 

This  at  once  opens  other  fascinating  problems  to  the  general  reader.  There  are 
other  causes  of  high  suggestibility  beside  hypnosis.  These  are  very  evident  in 
our  everyday  life,  in  fact  they  are  all  important.  What  is  the  relation  of 
hypnotism  to  these  other  factors  ?  Is  it  not  perhaps  possible  to  explain  all  with 


one  general  formula?  Might  we  not,  using  hypnotism  as  a  point  of  departure,  be 
able  to  understand  the  phenomenon  of  Hitler,  the  basis  of  mob  psychology? 


With  this  end  in  view  the  writer  advances  the  theory  outlined  in  the  next  few 
pages.  Hypnotism  is  of  fascinating  interest,  but  if  it  has  no  use  outside  the 
psychological  laboratory,  or  in  handling  the  insane  it  must,  of  necessity,  be  of 
very  little  practical  use  to  humanity  as  a  whole.  But  if  we  can  advance  a  simple 
working  theory  which  explains  both  hypnotism  and,  say,  Hitler  at  one  and  the 
same  time,  then  we  are  being  of  much  greater  service  to  the  general  public. 

In  our  opinion  we  can  do  so  and  the  reader  is  asked  to  give  special  attention  to 
the  following  pages  of  this  chapter.  The  hypothesis  we  advance  is  intended  to 
cover  the  subject  in  very  simple  fashion.  We  purposely  avoid  many  neat 
psychological  questions  as  being  of  interest  only  to  the  professional 
psychologist.  This  leaves  us  open  to  the  charge  of  oversimplification  but  a 
popular  work  such  as  this  must  view  the  question  "writ  large." 

The  details  we  leave  for  those  round-table  discussions  wherein  men  of  science 
delight  to  go  scalp  hunting.  As  a  matter  of  fact  the  Iroquois  raider  and  the 
scientist  are  twin  brothers.  Scalp  hunting  is  the  great  national  pastime  and  a 
very  legitimate  pastime  at  that.  If  the  scientist  "leads  with  his  chin,"  he  may  be 
perfectly  certain  that,  before  many  harvest  moons  have  passed  he  will  be 
defending  the  old  log  cabin  against  the  marauding  hordes.  That  is  all  to  the 
good.  It  keeps  him  on  his  toes  and  guarantees  scientific  progress. 

The  human  brain  is  a  very  complex  photographic  plate.  The  analogy  is  crude 
but  it  will  serve  as  an  illustration.  Needless  to  say  it  is  a  repeater  in  the  sense 
that  photos  are  being  registered  every  moment  of  our  waking  existence,  and  by 
all  the  various  sense  organs  of  sight,  hearing,  smell,  taste,  skin  senses  and 
others  which  are  more  obscure.  We,  however,  are  interested  in  one  peculiarity 
of  this  plate  which  is  of  great  importance.  It  is  provided  with  its  own  sensitizer. 
Most  of  the  photographs,  the  experiences  of  everyday  life  are  more  or  less  on  a 
dead  level.  They  make  a  certain  impression,  we  note  it  and  act  accordingly, 
then  we  probably  forget  the  photo  in  question  for  the  rest  of  our  natural  lives. 

Some  photographs-experiences-however  leave  a  lasting  impression.  Five  years 
age  we  were  in  an  auto  crash.  Why  should  we  remember  that  vividly,  but  not  be 
able  to  recall  anything  else  for  that  entire  year,  at  least  not  recall  without  an 
effort.  Just  common  sense!  Possibly,  but  why?  We  distinctly  and  vividly  recall 
that  at  the  age  of  five,  or  six,  or  seven  we  were  bitten  by  a  police  dog  while 
visiting  our  uncle's  farm.  We  will  have  to  think  in  order  to  recall  any  other 


details  of  that  visit,  yet  the  dog  experience  keeps  flashing  through  our  mind 
even  when  we  don't  think.  Again  it  is  just  common  sense  but  why? 

Because  at  that  particular  moment  the  sensitive  plate  in  the  brain  was  vastly 
more  sensitive  than  at  any  other  time  during  the  whole  year.  The  negative  was 
"over  exposed,"  to  draw  another  analogy  from  photography  and  the  photo 
indelibly  burned  into  the  plate.  Nothing  we  can  do  in  later  life  will  ever  remove 
that  scar.  All  other  experiences  of  that  entire  year  may  become  cloudy,  may 
finally  disappear  completely  so  far  as  we  are  concerned,  but  every  time  we  see 
a  police  dog  that  old  experience  of  thirty  or  fifty  years  ago  stands  out  as  vividly 
as  if  it  were  yesterday. 

Moreover,  as  we  will  see  in  later  chapters,  these  are  just  the  experiences  which 
really  count.  They  determine  our  personalities.  We  could  take  an  entire  college 
course  on  dogs,  could  meet  all  kinds  of  dogs  anywhere.  We  might  even  write  a 
book  on  dogs  but  we  know  one  thing  for  certain,  we  do  not  like  the  police  dog. 
Why?  Because  one  bit  us  fifty  years  ago.  It  might  just  as  well  have  been  a 
collie  or  a  bull,  but  it  wasn't.  Logic  has  nothing  to  do  with  the  situation.  It  was  a 
police  dog  so  they  are  damned  in  our  eyes  for  all  eternity. 

It  is  this  type  of  non-logical,  highly  emotional  reaction  which  makes  the  world 
go  round,  which  leads  us  into  the  state  of  chaos  which  exists  at  the  present  day. 
For  society  is  essentially  a  society  of  human  beings  which,  in  many  cases,  takes 
its  cue  from  some  one  leader.  Should  this  leader  be  unbalanced,  overambitious, 
or  a  weakling,  then  all  too  often  his  followers  will  be  sacrificed  at  the  altar  of 
his  fanaticism  or  his  incompetence. 

There  are,  as  far  the  writer  can  see,  two  known  devices  by  which  the  brain  plate 
can  be  sensitized.  One  is  hypnotism,  the  other  is  emotion.  Suggestions  given  in 
hypnotism  or  under  emotional  strain  are  carried  out  with  an  energy  which  is 
quite  foreign  to  normal  human  conduct.  The  reader  will  note  that  suggestion 
does  not  have  to  be  verbal  nor  recognized  as  suggestion  at  the  time.  Any 
experience  flashing  on  the  mind  at  such  times  may  act  as  a  suggestion.  In 
hypnotism  these  are  generally  by  the  spoken  word,  but  in  everyday  life  this  is 
far  from  being  the  case.  The  police  dog  incident  was  a  very  strong  suggestion. 
The  newspaper  is  one  of  the  most  powerful  of  suggestive  media,  especially  in  a 
controlled  press.  But  the  controlled  radio  is  easily  the  most  potent  weapon  we 
have  for  attaining  such  ends  in  our  modern  civilization. 

What  has  all  this  to  do  with  hypnotism?  Let  us  take  a  little  excursion  into 
psychology  for  the  next  few  pages  and  perhaps  we  can  then  see  the  very  close 
tie-up  between  hypnotic  suggestion  and  the  type  of  suggestion  which  is  so 


potent  in  our  daily  lives,  the  suggestion  which  falls  on  a  brain  sensitized  by 
emotion. 


The  great  driving  force  behind  all  animal  activity  is  the  pleasure-pain  principle, 
the  search  for  pleasure,  the  avoidance  of  pain.  No  normal  human  being  will 
deliberately  step  on  a  tack,  unless  of  course  there  is  a  higher  pleasure  involved. 
If  his  child  is  in  danger  of  being  burned  to  death  he  may  not  only  step  on  a  tack 
but  get  fatally  burned  himself  attempting  a  rescue.  These  things  are  relative. 

We  sit  quietly  in  the  dentist's  chair  and  submit  willingly  (  ?)  to  his  tortures  for 
we  know  only  too  well  that  if  not  today,  then  six  months  from  today  he  will 
have  us  at  his  mercy.  And  that  six  months  will  not  make  the  ordeal  any  easier. 
Also  in  the  human  these  pleasures  may  be  ideal.  Read  the  tortures  which  the 
early  Jesuits  suffered  at  the  hands  of  the  Indians  in  The  Bloody  Mohawk  by 
Clarke.  It  does  us  modern  hampered  humans  good  at  times  to  realize  what  men 
will  suffer  for  an  ideal.  Yet  that  suffering  was  in  answer  to  the  pleasure 
principle,  weird  as  the  contradiction  may  seem  to  the  average  of  humanity. 

This  pleasure  principle  has  its  basis  in  the  instinct.  In  view  of  the  fact  that  the 
word  instinct  is  unpopular  in  scientific  circles  these  days  the  reader  may  think 
in  terms  of  drives  or  impulses  if  he  chooses.  Psychology  has  officially  thrown 
instinct  out  the  front  door,  then  given  it  a  new  name  and  welcomed  it  in  by  the 
kitchen  entrance.  The  writer  prefers  the  word  instinct  and  will  use  it  in  spite  of 
its  black  name  in  psychological  circles. 

These  instincts  are  almost  always  of  such  a  nature  that  they  aid  in  survival  of 
the  species,  but  not  necessarily  of  the  individual.  Pleasure  is  the  reward  which 
the  animal  receives  for  carrying  out  the  instinct,  pain  is  the  red  light,  the 
warning  not  to  repeat  the  offense  in  the  future. 

Moreover,  since  these  instincts  are  basic,  are  the  foundations  on  which  a 
species  survives  or  is  exterminated,  it  is  very  important  that  they  be  reinforced. 
Closely  tied  up  with  these  various  instincts  we  have  certain  emotions,  such  as 
fear,  rage  or  love,  and  these  emotions  together  with  their  attendant  feelings  of 
pleasure  or  the  opposite  sensitize  the  brain.  Thus  experiences  which  directly 
arouse  our  instincts  tend  to  make  a  greater  impression  on  the  brain  plate,  to  be 
remembered  better,  as  we  say.  We  can  look  on  them  as  suggestions. 

Finally,  just  a  word  as  to  intelligence.  It  was  long  the  custom  to  contrast  instinct 
and  intelligence.  Instinct  represented  the  baser  side  of  man,  whereas 
intelligence  was  something  on  a  much  higher  plane,  the  pure  and  noble  side  of 
man's  nature.  Actually  intelligence  is  the  servant  of  the  instinct,  of  the  pleasure 
principle.  We  use  our  intelligence  to  gratify  our  search  for  pleasure,  be  these 


pleasures  low  or  idealistic.  We  may  reason  with  a  child  for  days  to  no  effect. 
We  may  tell  little  Johnny  that  he  is  not  to  play  with  strange  dogs,  and  he  is 
unimpressed.  Let  one  of  those  same  dogs  take  a  nip  at  him  and  he  has  learned 
his  lesson.  That  one  experience,  falling  on  a  brain  sensitized  by  fear,  will  leave 
a  lasting  impression.  It  is  "burned  in"  so  to  speak. 

Hypnotism  and  emotion,  be  that  emotion  pleasurable  or  the  opposite,  are  the 
only  forces  which  we  are  certain  have  this  effect  on  the  photographic  plate  of 
the  brain.  It  seems  possible  that  certain  drugs,  such  as  alcohol  may  under 
certain  circumstances,  produce  the  same  results,  but  we  are  not  certain.  It  is 
highly  probable  that  hypnotism  in  its  turn  depends  on  emotion.  Ferenczi,  a 
psychoanalyst,  has  given  a  formula  which  may  very  easily  express  the 
situation.  He  says,  "Suggestion  depends  on  transference  and  transference  is  a 
shifting  of  the  libido." 

In  plainer  English,  his  theory  runs  somewhat  along  these  lines.  In  hypnotism 
the  operator  takes  the  place  of  the  subject's  parent,  father  or  mother.  The 
subject  transfers  to  the  hypnotist  Ow  feeling  he  had  for  this  parent  as  a  child. 
The  attitude  of  the  Operator  in  question  will  determine  whether  he  is  to  be 
father  or  mother.  If  the  subject,  as  a  child,  was  submissive  to  this  parent,  he  will 
be  a  good  hypnotic  subject  and  vice  versa.  This  Attitude  of  the  child  is 
obviously  one  of  emotion,  so  that  hypnotism,  according  to  Ferenczi,  would 
depend  on  emotion.  A  neat  theory  which  may  or  may  not  be  true.  The  writer  is 
inclined  to  favor  it. 

lie  that  as  it  may,  we  can  now  perhaps  see  a  little  more  clearly  how  the  laws  of 
hypnotism  may  become  so  very  important  in  our  everyday  life.  Every  situation 
we  face  in  life  is  a  social  situation,  that  is  to  say  it  involves  other  people. 

Almost  invariably  this  situation  involves  a  leader.  He  may  be  appointed,  he 
may  seize  authority,  or  he  may  just  gravitate  to  the  top.  The  boss  in  the  office  is 
a  typical  example,  the  dictator  on  the  radio  not  so  typical  but  far  more 
powerful.  Now  if  by  any  device  this  leader  can  arouse  our  emotions,  can  "get 
under  our  skins,"  then  his  words,  his  suggestions,  falling  on  our  sensitized 
brains  will  have  far  more  weight  than  those  same  suggestions  given  us  by  a 
stranger  or  in  a  magazine  article  where  no  emotion  is  involved.  He  is,  to  all 
intents  and  purposes,  a  hypnotist. 

Our  reactions  may  be  antagonistic-negative  suggestionbut  we  will  react 
violently.  But  if  the  dictator  or  boss  in  question  knows  his  business  he  will  take 
care  that  they  do  not  arouse  antagonism.  He  will  appeal  to  the  pleasure 
principle  in  some  form  or  other.  He  will  tell  us  that  we  are  being  persecuted, 
robbed,  hemmed  in.  He  will  appeal  to  our  patriotism,  our  love  of  home  and 


family.  He  will  promise  us  security,  wealth,  glory  if  we  but  do  as  he  says.  And 
if  he  knows  what  he  is  about  we  will  fall  under  his  spell  just  as  surely  as  a 
subject  ever  falls  under  the  trance  of  a  hypnotist. 

This  technique  of  "direct"  or  "prestige"  suggestion  we  see  clearly  in  the  stage 
hypnotist.  His  success  depends  on  a  forceful,  frontal  attack.  He  never  allows 
the  subject's  gaze  to  shift  from  his  own  and  literally  bullies  him  into  the 
hypnotic  trance.  Here  we  have  clear  evidence  of  the  emotional  factor  in 
hypnosis.  The  psychologist  in  his  laboratory  also  uses  this  prestige  suggestion 
although  in  a  quieter  form.  But  whether  it  be  the  stage  hypnotist,  the  laboratory 
psychologist  or  Hitler  on  the  radio  results  are  the  same,  so  far  as  psychology  is 
concerned.  The  suggestions  fall  on  a  highly  sensitized  brain  and  such 
suggestions  have  tremendous  force,  a  force  altogether  out  of  proportion  to  any 
value  that  the  proposals,  as  such,  may  have. 

Let  us  now  consider  a  few  facts  which  we  have  gathered  from  our  study  of 
hypnotism  in  the  laboratory.  One  in  every  five  of  the  human  race  are  highly 
suggestible,  at  least  half  are  suggestible  to  a  very  considerable  degree.  But  here 
mere  figures  do  not  tell  the  story.  That  one-fifth  has  a  power  far  beyond  its 
numbers,  for  this  type  of  man,  acting  under  direct  suggestion,  is  no  mere 
average  person.  He  is  a  fanatic  in  the  highest-or  lowest-sense  of  the  word.  The 
writer  several  years  ago  had  a  very  unpleasant  experience  which  illustrates  the 
point.  He  wished  to  show  the  power  of  the  posthypnotic  suggestion  so  he 
suggested  to  Smith  that,  on  awakening  he  would  go  over  and  insist  on  sitting  in 
Brown's  chair.  Smith  and  Brown  were  relative  strangers.  When  he  was 
awakened,  Smith  paused  a  moment,  then  got  up  and  walked  over  to  Brown. 

"Mind  if  I  sit  in  your  chair?"  "Yes.  I  like  the  chair  myself."  Without  a  word 
Smith  reached  down,  took  Brown  by  the  shoulder,  and  literally  hurled  him 
across  the  room.  Then  he  sat  down,  muttering  savagely  that  if  Brown  so  much 
as  opened  his  mouth  he'd  send  him  through  the  window  as  well.  And  he  meant 
just  that.  A  few  such  experiences  teach  the  operator  to  "take  it  easy."  On 
another  occasion  the  writer  suggested  to  a  subject  in  hypnotism  that  an 
individual  he  particularly  disliked  was  standing  in  front  of  the  door.  Without  an 
instant's  hesitation  the  subject  strode  up  to  the  door  and  drove  his  fist  through 
the  panel.  The  individual  who  is  highly  suggestible,  whether  from  hypnotism  or 
from  strong  emotion,  reacts  with  a  passionate  fury  which  leaves  us  other  mere 
mortals  staring  in  open-eyed  wonder.  But  it  is  terribly  real,  as  Europe  can 
testify  today. 

There  is  still  another  line  of  approach  which  shows  us  the  very  close  relation 
between  the  suggestibility  of  hypnotism  and  that  arising  from  the  emotions. 


Basic  to  psychoanalysis,  as  outlined  by  Freud,  is  the  so-called  complex.  Freud 
discovered  that  many  of  our  early  childhood  experiences  are  forgotten  in  a 
curious  sort  of  way.  The  forgetting  is  not  passive  but  active;  they  do  not  just 
fade  away  into  oblivion,  they  are  literally  thrown  out  of  consciousness,  they  are 
"repressed"  into  the  unconscious. 

Such  experiences  are  always  unpleasant  in  nature  and  are  forced  out  of 
consciousness  in  accord  with  the  pleasure  principle  we  have  already  stressed. 
Not  only  will  the  body  not  undergo  pain  willingly,  unless  for  a  future  pleasure, 
but  the  mind  also  turns  away  from  painful  thoughts.  The  reader  can  easily  think 
of  exceptions,  but  we  would  again  warn  that  many  apparent  exceptions  are  not 
real.  A  person  may  brood  over  bad  treatment,  which  is  unpleasant,  but  this  in 
turn  may  bring  up  the  feeling  of  self-pity  which  is  very  pleasant.  Or  he  may 
plan  revenge,  thinking  out  various  ways  in  which  he  will  even  up  the  score. 

This  also  may  be  pleasant. 

Actually,  however,  the  pleasure  principle  does  not  work  in  nearly  as  clear  cut 
form  in  the  mind  as  in  the  body.  To  a  great  degree  we  lose  the  power  of 
repression  after  the  age  of  five,  although  under  great  stress,  as  in  war,  it  may 
still  act  very  effectively.  But  it  does  work  in  childhood  and  Freud  discovered 
that  many  of  the  neuroses  have  their  origin  in  these  repressions.  They  are 
"down"  but  not  "out."  Why  they  are  not  out  is  beside  our  discussion  here,  but 
once  they  become  installed  in  the  unconscious  they  can  cause  a  lot  of  trouble. 

For  example,  a  child  is  badly  frightened  by  a  cat.  Later  in  life  he  develops  a 
fear,  a  phobia  of  cats.  Yet  strange  to  say  the  original  experience  in  which  he 
was  frightened  has  been  completely  forgotten.  Note  the  close  resemblance  to 
the  posthypnotic  suggestion.  All  we  need  is  the  hypnotist,  rather  than  the  cat,  to 
give  the  suggestion  and  the  parallel  would  be  complete.  These  complexes  act  in 
very  curious  fashion.  We  can  tell  what  causes  them  but  we  cannot  predict 
results.  A  little  boy  was  going  to  the  store.  He  had  to  pass  through  a  narrow 
alley  way  closed  at  both  ends  by  a  door.  He  got  into  the  alley,  the  door  behind 
him  snapped  shut,  the  door  in  front  was  closed.  Then  he  found  there  was  a  dog 
in  the  alley  as  well,  which  promptly  attacked  him.  This  frightened  the  child 
very  badly.  In  later  life  this  incident  was  forgotten,  repressed,  but  the  complex 
did  its  work.  Strange  to  say,  however,  he  did  not  develop  a  fear  of  dogs,  as  one 
would  have  expected,  but  a  fear  of  closed  spaces-claustrophobia.  His  main  idea 
was  to  get  out  of  that  closed  alley.  This  was  the  autosuggestion  which,  given  in 
a  state  of  great  emotion,  later  came  out  as  a  complex-a  posthypnotic  suggestion. 

Another  little  boy  was  sliding  down  hill.  His  sled  collided  with  a  fence  and  his 
hand  was  badly  cut.  The  doctor  could  not  give  him  an  anaesthetic,  but  had  to 


sew  up  the  hand  while  he  was  wide  awake,  a  very  painful  and  terrifying 
experience.  This  was  repressed  and  later  came  out,  not  as  a  fear  of  doctors,  but 
a  fear  of  black  bags.  The  doctor  had  with  him  a  black  bag  and  the  eyes  of  the 
child  were  riveted  on  this  bag,  for  from  here  the  doctor  took  the  instruments 
which  caused  him  so  much  pain. 

This  particular  type  of  posthypnotic  suggestion  may  come  out  in  various  ways, 
but  the  complex  is,  to  all  intents  and  puiposes,  a  posthypnotic  suggestion. 

Fright  by  a  cat  may  appear  in  later  life  as  a  fear  of  cats.  But  it  may  just  as  easily 
come  out  in  the  form  of  a  compulsion  to  kill  cats.  The  writer  had  a  friend  who 
got  himself  in  no  end  of  trouble  with  his  neighbors  because  of  this.  Or  again  it 
may  appear  as  an  obsession  that  people  are  looking  at  him  with  cat's  eyes.  This 
may  become  so  strong  that  the  individual  may  be  very  dangerous,  even 
murdering  his  supposed  persecutor. 

But  note  again  the  very  close  tie-up  between  the  complex  and  the  posthypnotic 
suggestion.  The  complex,  we  know,  is  definitely  caused  by  strong  unpleasant 
emotion.  Moreover,  it  works  along  almost  identical  lines  with  the  posthypnotic 
suggestion.  Not  quite  as  specific,  to  be  sure,  but  just  as  compulsive.  Also  we 
would  find  the  other  characteristic  of  the  posthypnotic  suggestion  present  if  we 
cared  to  look,  namely  rationalization. 

So  here  again  we  see  that  emotion  and  hypnotism  seem  to  sensitize  the  brain  in 
identical  fashion.  The  suggestion  which  is  given  in  either  case  leaves  an 
indelible  impression  and  provokes  to  acts  which  are  quite  apart  from  any 
intellectual  processes  the  individual  may  use. 

We  may  summarize  the  last  few  pages  somewhat  as  follows.  Suggestibility, 
present  in  all  people  to  a  greater  or  less  degree,  is  very  marked  in  certain 
individuals.  This  appears  due  to  the  fact  that  their  brains  can  be  very  easily 
sensitized  to  "photographs "-experiences-either  by  hypnotism  or  by  emotion. 

We  do  not  know  whether  the  hypnotic  subject  is  always  the  one  who  in  adult 
life  is  open  to  emotional  sensitization,  for  no  great  amount  of  investigation  has 
been  done  on  this  question.  It  does  seem  highly  probable  that  hypnotism  is 
closely  linked  to  emotion,  and  these  two  types  of  brain  sensitization  are 
essentially  one  and  the  same. 

Hence  comes  the  great  importance  of  hypnotism  as  a  "laboratory"  in  which  to 
study  this  whole  problem  of  suggestibility,  for  the  phenomena  of  suggestion  are 
tremendously  important.  Around  this  question  centers  the  whole  problem  of 
mob  psychology,  the  psychology  of  such  leaders  as  Hitler.  Without  in  any 
way  juggling  words  we  can  truthfully  say  that  he  is  one  of  the  greatest 


hypnotists  of  all  time.  Yet  he  may  never  have  heard  of  the  subject.  We  will 
return  to  this  in  the  later  chapters  of  the  book.